advertisement
HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape
Library
User Guide
HP Part Number: QN998-96034
Published: December 2011
Edition: 2nd
© Copyright 2011 Hewlett-Packard Development
Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial
Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under vendor's standard commercial license.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Contents
1 Library Overview......................................................................................11
2 Modifying the Library Configuration............................................................23
Contents 3
3 Operating the Library...............................................................................70
4 Contents
Logging On From the Library Management Console (LMC) Using a Web Browser......................70
4 Monitoring the library...............................................................................99
Contents 5
5 Maintaining the library...........................................................................123
6 Contents
6 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes.....................................................161
7 Managing library firmware and software versions.......................................169
8 Troubleshooting your Library....................................................................179
Contents 7
9 Support and other resources....................................................................208
A ESKM Management Solutions..................................................................210
B Frequently Asked Questions.....................................................................214
C Product Safety Statements........................................................................215
D Regulatory statements.............................................................................216
8 Contents
Contents 9
Glossary..................................................................................................231
Index.......................................................................................................233
10 Contents
1 Library Overview
The ESL G3 automates the retrieval, storage, and control of tape cartridges. Application software on the host can use the library robotics to mount cartridges into tape drives and retrieve them without operator intervention.
The library can be installed on a solid or raised floor. It has a standard 19-inch rack footprint and can be placed in a standard server rack space. Because the library provides access by way of the access and service doors, the library can be placed with either side against a wall or between racks.
shows a front view of the library, consisting of a control module and an expansion module.
Figure 1 Front view of a control module and expansion module
1. Expansion module
3. Operator Control Panel (OCP)
5. I/E station
2. Indicator panel
4. Access doors
6. Control module
The library is designed for ease of installation, configuration, and field upgrades. The minimum library configuration consists of one control module. You can add up to 11 expansion modules as storage and tape drive requirements change.
NOTE: Expansion modules in positions nine through twelve are storage-only modules and do not contain I/E stations or drives.
The maximum library configuration can accommodate:
•
1 control module
•
0 to 11 expansion modules
•
102 to 5322 cartridges
•
1 to 96 tape drives
11
A library Import/Export (I/E) Station configuration can accommodate:
•
1 to 24-port I/E station in the control module and 1 to 7 I/E stations, one in each of the first
7 expansion modules.
Or
•
1 24-port I/E station in the control module and up to 7 72-slot I/E stations, one in each of the first 7 expansion modules.
Library Features
Density
The library provides a storage density of 758 cartridges (LTO) per square meter. Each module, also referred to as a frame, has two storage racks: one on the drive side and another on the door side. A rack consists of up to 10 horizontal sections and three or four columns of magazines, depending on the rack configuration. Each magazine, located at the intersection of a particular section and a particular column, consists of six cartridge slots.
Centralized Management
The Library Management Console (LMC) gives you a single point from which to view all library components, including robotics, drives, storage, I/E stations, and network connectivity. You can use this graphical user interface both locally from the library OCP and remotely from a remote client. The LMC communicates with the LMC server that runs on the library. The LMC uses a simple and intuitive graphical style that is secure and provides library managers with native partitioning ability.
Proactive Availability
The library can alert you about problems before they occur. The library also monitors its six major subsystems (drives, power, robotics, cooling, connectivity, and control). You can configure the library to send notifications of problems to one or more e-mail accounts. For more information about the library monitoring and reporting capabilities,
“Maintaining the library” (page 123)
.
Serviceability and Reliability
The library has extensive serviceability and reliability features. You can hot swap drives, power supplies (in redundant power configurations only), and fans.
Your backup system and data path are idle most of the time. When backups begin, the system is used intensively at maximum bandwidth. The library provides you with notifications and a robust event system that notifies you of any problems it identifies, enabling you to solve them before backups begin. For more information about the library notification system, event system, and other troubleshooting help, see
“Troubleshooting your Library” (page 179) .
Host Attachment
Requests issued from the host application result in cartridge movement in the library. The primary requests issued are for mounting and dismounting cartridges in and out of the tape drives and for importing and exporting cartridges in and out of the library. The library manages the physical location. In addition to requesting cartridge movement in the library, the host application can use the Fibre Channel (FC) command interface to obtain status information, configuration information, and cartridge storage information from the library.
Tape drives are directly attached to host systems or to the SAN. The library robot control path is presented through one or more tape drive ports, depending on Partitioning and Failover configuration.
12 Library Overview
Remote Management
The library can be managed locally or remotely using the LMC. Locally, the LMC appears on the
OCP on the front of the library. Remotely, the LMC is accessed through a client instance of the
LMC software on any computer on the network. For more information about access, see
On From the Library Management Console (LMC) Using a Web Browser” (page 70) . For more
information about the LMC, see
“Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC)” (page 74) .
The LMC provides additional monitoring of a SAN-attached library over the network to a management server by using Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). This includes library subsystem health and status information and early fault notification.
The library also supports the Common Information Model (CIM) server based on the Storage
Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) on the MCB. A CIM client can use the CIM server to monitor the SAN-attached library.
Capacity on Demand
ESL G3 tape libraries can be purchased at starting points of 100, 300, 700, 1500, 3000, or
5000 cartridge slots enabled. Adding physical Expansion Modules does not automatically enable new slots. Instead, slots are flexibly enabled for use in groups of approximately 100 through capacity upgrade licenses.
Control Module
All library configurations include the control module, which contains the following components at a minimum (see
):
•
Library management module (LMM)
•
I/E station
•
Tape drives
•
Cartridge storage
•
Operator panel
•
Power system
•
I/O Management Unit and Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB)
Control Module 13
Figure 2 Front and back view of the control module
1. Magazines and cartridge slots
3. Control module back view
5. Drive clusters
7. Library management module
9. Picker
2. Control module front view
4. I/E station
6. I/O management unit
8. Power supplies
10. Accessor
Expansion Modules
Expansion modules enable the library to expand by adding space for tape drives, I/E stations, and cartridges. Each expansion module can add several hundred LTO cartridge slots, depending on the number of tape drives installed and whether an I/E station is installed. See
and
. The library maximum configuration includes 11 expansion modules for a total of 12 modules. Expansion modules can only be added to the right of the control module.
NOTE: Expansion modules in positions 9-12 are storage-only modules and do not contain I/E stations or drives.
The expansion modules can accommodate the following components:
•
I/O management unit (optional)
•
Tape drives (optional)
•
I/E station (optional)
•
Cartridge storage
•
AC power compartment (required only if drives are added)
If an expansion module contains only cartridges, all power is derived from the control module.
14 Library Overview
Figure 3 Expansion module with location of 24 slot I/E station
1. Drive cluster (optional) location
3. I/E station 24 slot (optional) location
5. Drive side
2. Cartridge magazines location
4. Door side
Figure 4 Expansion module with location of 72 slot I/E station
1. Drive cluster (optional) location
3. Middle X-axis rail
5. Door side
2. Magazines location
4. 72–slot I/E station (optional) location
6. Drive side
An expansion module can have no I/E station, a 24 slot I/E station, or a 72 slot I/E station.
The 24-slot I/E station has a capacity of 24 LTO cartridges that are located in four removable magazines.
The 72- slot I/E station consists of two side-by-side 36-slot I/E stations that can operate as one
72-slot I/E station or can operate independently. Each 36-slot I/E station provides I/E capacity of
36 LTO cartridges in six removable magazines.
Expansion Modules 15
Library Management Module
The library management module (LMM) controls and manages library hardware and software components. It enables both SAN-connected hosts and users who access the library using the operator panel to configure the library, obtain system status information, and perform various library functions. The LMM contains the management control blade (MCB), the robotics control unit (RCU), and the library motor driver (LMD), as shown in
Figure 5 Library management module boards
1. Management control blade
2. Robotics control unit
3. Library motor drive
Management Control Blade (MCB)
The MCB is the primary point of intelligent management in the library. The MCB stores firmware and configuration data for itself as well as most other intelligent components in the library. It also contains the LMC, which enables local or remote users or hosts to operate, configure, and monitor the library. The MCB collects status information on other components in the library and issues notifications when problems occur.
Robotics Control Unit (RCU)
The RCU provides robotics intelligence that controls accessor movements and functions, including picker, pivot, and reach actions.
Library Motor Driver (LMD)
The LMD monitors wiring, fuses, and relays within the library. It regulates power levels and performs other power-related functions, such as disabling robotics when a library door opens.
16 Library Overview
I/O Management Units
The I/O management unit supports the control management blade (CMB) and the Ethernet Expansion
Blade (EEB).
Control Management Blade (CMB)
The CMB performs unit status monitoring, including power and I/O present conditions. The CMB also enables you to update drive firmware without using a firmware update (FUP) tape.
Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB)
The Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB) provides Ethernet connectivity to each LTO drive for MCB-to-drive communication purposes only. The EEB is not in the data path. This EEB provides a control path to the drive for commands as well as facilitates taking drive logs and downloading drive firmware.
Each EEB has 6 Ethernet ports to allow attachment to 6 LTO drives. The EEB provides Ethernet connectivity to the library internal Ethernet and should not be connected to an external Ethernet source.
Picker (Cartridge Accessor)
The picker moves cartridges between storage cells, tape drives, and I/E stations. A picker is used to Get or Put cartridges in a storage cell or a tape drive slot. It moves along an X and Y axis and can pivot 180 degrees. A barcode scanner on the picker assembly identifies cartridges located in storage slots.
Import/Export Stations
I/E stations enable you to import and export cartridges without interrupting normal library operations. The I/E station is installed on the front of the control module and, optionally, any of the first seven expansion modules in larger library configurations. See
and
to see the location of the I/E station.
Each 24-slot I/E station contains four removable magazines for a total of 24 LTO tape cartridges.
Each 72-slot I/E station contains twelve removable magazines for a total of 72 LTO tape cartridges.
NOTE: The I/E station cannot be configured as a storage location, but it can be part of a logical division of library resources known as partitions. For information about partitions, see
Extended I/E Option
The number of I/E slots in a library is usually associated with the number of I/E slots in an actual physical I/E station, but this physical slot count could limit how many I/E slots may be available to a host application.
Extended I/E configurations remove such I/E slot count limitations by increasing the I/E slot count for a partition with storage slots that will be reported to a host as I/E slots. Therefore, Extended
I/E allows the user to configure their partitions with I/E slots beyond the number of physical I/E slots configured in the library. As a result, the host can export more media than previously allowed.
Keep in mind that as Extended I/E slots are used, less storage slots are available. You will need to initiate move/import operations of tape cartridges into the extended I/E area for host access.
Conversely, to move/export tape cartridges from Extended I/E area slots to the emptied physical
I/E Station slots, you need to initiate the move/export operation from the user interface for physical access to the library.
I/O Management Units 17
NOTE: By default, the Extended I/E feature is disabled and is only available on ESL G3 libraries.
Extended I/E can be enabled/disabled from the Physical Library dialog box.
To configure a partition with Extended I/E segments, the user must use the Partition Wizard
(Setup
→Partition→Configure). The Extended I/E feature is only available in Expert creation mode or if you are modifying an existing partition. See
“Creating Partitions Manually Using Expert Mode”
.
Extended I/E must be enabled before using it. When configuring Extended I/E in a partition, ensure you have enough licensed slots (Capacity On Demand — COD) to accommodate the new
Extended I/E slots, since Extended I/E slots use the COD licensed slot count.
When you configure Extended I/E slots you must have at least one physical I/E segment configured in the partition. The maximum number of physical and Extended I/E slots per partition is 240.
Cartridges
Cartridges are stored in magazines within the library, as shown in
Figure 6 Example of LTO cartridge insertion into a magazine
1. LTO cartridge
3. LTO magazine
2. Magazine barcode
4. Cartridge barcode location
Each cartridge has an operator-attached, machine-readable barcode label on it for identification purposes. The library can dynamically support barcode labels that consist of 6 characters plus a
2-character media identifier.
For more information about tape cartridges, see
.
For additional specification information, see
“Barcode Requirements” (page 162)
.
Cartridge Magazines
The cartridge magazine is a storage assembly that installs on the drive side or door side of the control module or expansion module, as shown in
. It contains 6 cartridge slots and provides flexibility when adding storage cartridges to a module.
18 Library Overview
Figure 7 Magazine and drive locations in the control module (left) and on the control module access door (right)
1. Lower drive cluster
3. Cartridge magazines
5. I/E station
7. Door side
9. Lower drive ports
11. Upper drive ports
2. Upper drive cluster
4. Middle X-axis rail
6. I/E station cartridge magazines
8. Drive side
10. Drives or cartridge magazines
See
for cartridge capacities.
Table 1 Cartridge capacities in library modules
Type of cartridge
Cartridges per magazine
Magazines per Control
Module
1
Magazines per
Expansion
Module
2
Control Module
Cartridge
Capacity
3
Expansion
Module Cartridge
Capacity
4
LTO 6 44 min/50 max 32 min/76 max 264 min/300 max
192 min/456 max
1
The minimum is based on having 12 drives installed. The maximum is based on having one drive and one I/E station installed.
2
The minimum is based on having an I/E station and 12 drives installed. The maximum is based on having no drives and no I/E station installed.
3
The minimum is based on having 12 drives installed. The maximum is based on having one drive and one I/E station installed.
4
The minimum is based on having an I/E station and 12 drives installed. The maximum is based on having no drives and no I/E station installed.
Each magazine has a barcode label that the scanner reads for identification and inventory. An optional, snap-on dust cover is available for the magazines. Magazines with the dust cover have interlocked stacking that enables easier storage of the media when they are removed from the library for external storage.
Support for WORM
The ESL G3 library supports WORM (write once, read many) technology in LTO-4 and LTO-5 tape drives.
Support for WORM 19
WORM allows non-erasable data to be written once and provides extra data security by prohibiting accidental data erasure.
Tape Drives
Tape drives are enclosed in a universal drive sled. You can hot swap and hot add all supported drives, regardless of type. The library supports HP LTO-4 and LTO-5 FC Multi-mode tape drives.
The control module and expansion modules have upper and lower drive clusters. Each library must have at least one tape drive. Each drive cluster can house up to six tape drives for a total of 12 drives. Additional drives can be added to the first seven expansion modules in the configuration.
This enables you to have a total of 96 drives.
NOTE: When you add drives, you lose storage slots.
Drives must be installed in bottom-to-top order in the control module before any are added to the first expansion module. There are two six-drive clusters in each of the first eight modules.
NOTE: The term drive cluster defines a grouping of up to six tape drives below or above the middle X-axis rail.
shows the locations of drives in the control module.
LTO Drives
LTO drives are supported as shown in
Table 2 LTO drive and cartridge compatibility
LTO-4 Drives
LTO-5 Drives
LTO-4 Cartridge
Reads/Writes
Reads/Writes
LTO-4 WORM
Write Once, Read
Many
Write Once, Read
Many
LTO-5 Cartridge
Not compatible
Reads/Writes
LTO-5 WORM
Not compatible
Write Once, Read
Many
All LTO cartridges are the same size, which means they use the same magazines in the library.
LTO drives can be directly attached to hosts or attached to the SAN.
Operator Panel
The operator panel is located on the front of the control module and consists of the indicator panel and the OCP (see
Figure 8 (page 21) ). In the indicator panel, the buttons are for robot control and
power, and the indicators provide library status.
20 Library Overview
Figure 8 Operator Panel
1. Status indicator
3. OCP
2. Power indicator/button
4. Robotics enabled indicator/button
The OCP is the library navigation point and provides access to the LMC. For more information about the OCP and the LMC, see
“Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC)” (page 74)
.
Power System
The library supports single and redundant power configurations. The single configuration has a single AC line input and single DC power supply. The redundant configuration has dual AC line input and dual DC power supplies. You can hot swap a power supply if you have a redundant power supply. You can hot add a second power supply.
The power system consists of the following:
•
Power supply
•
Power distribution unit (PDU)
•
AC power cord
A single power switch, located on the access door, turns on and off all power for the control module and attached expansion modules. Each PDU has a second circuit breaker, located in the rear of the module, that controls the module power supply output. The power supply has three LEDs that provide status information. The power system also has four fuses for system protection.
Using the library demonstration mode
By running the library in demonstration (demo) mode, you can demonstrate the ability of the library to move scratch media from an I/E station to a randomly selected storage slot, and then move media from storage slot to open storage slot until you pause or stop the demonstration.
Non-demonstration media in the storage racks are not affected by the demonstration. While the demonstration proceeds, graphs on the main LMC display show data transfer and mount statistics using data that the demonstration routine provides. Demo mode is available only from the library
OCP.
Starting demo mode
To start the demo mode:
1.
Log onto the library from the local OCP as the Service user.
2.
Make sure that no applications are accessing the library.
Power System 21
3.
If you are not already working from the physical library, from the View menu, click the name of the physical library. Refer to Selecting a Library or Partition if you need more information on viewing the library.
4.
Take the library offline.
5.
Select Service
→Start Demo.
A Start Demo message appears.
6.
Remove any non-demonstration cartridges from the I/E station, and then put one or more demonstration cartridges into the I/E station.
CAUTION: Any cartridges left in the I/E station will be used in the demonstration.
7.
Select OK when you are ready to start the demonstration.
Before the demonstration starts, the library performs an inventory. As the accessor moves cartridges, an intentional delay of two seconds occurs between move media commands. This prevents unnecessary wear on the robotics.
CAUTION: Do not take the library back online while the demo is running.
Pausing demo mode
You can pause the demonstration anytime while it is in progress. To do so:
1.
While the demonstration is in process, select Service
→Pause Demo.
The current SCSI command completes before the library returns control to you. For example, if the library is performing an inventory, it could take several minutes before the inventory command completes.
While the demonstration is paused, you can open an access door, take the library online, or perform any library operation.
2.
To continue the demonstration at the point at which you paused it, select Service
→Resume
Demo.
The demonstration will start again where it left off.
Stopping demo mode
To stop the demo mode, select Service
→Stop Demo.
The current command will complete before the accessor returns the demo cartridges to their original slots in the I/E station.
22 Library Overview
2 Modifying the Library Configuration
Before you can manage your library from a remote Library Management Console (LMC) client, you must initially configure the library from the Operator Control Panel (OCP) on the library itself by either running the Setup Wizard command or using individual configuration commands from the Setup menu.
After the initial setup, you can use either the OCP or the LMC to modify your library configuration.
The Setup menu includes most of the configuration commands.
NOTE: Only one administrator can be logged on and performing library configuration at any one time. If another administrator attempts to log on, a message appears, warning that only one administrator at a time is permitted on the library. If a service user logs on while an administrator or regular users are logged on already, the library automatically logs off those users.
Setup Wizard Prerequisites
Before you run the Setup Wizard:
•
Note the name and IP address of your network Domain Name Server (DNS) or the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for your network segment.
•
Verify that your network is attached to the library network connection.
Accessing the Setup Wizard
Before using the Setup Wizard, see
“Setup Wizard Prerequisites” (page 23) .
To access the setup wizard from the OCP or the LMC:
1.
Log on as administrator. The home screen appears.
2.
Verify in the System Information section, in the Name field that the physical library is selected.
If necessary, select it by one of the following methods:
•
In the Managed Views section of the screen, click on the name of the physical library.
•
From the menu bar, select View, then the name of the library.
3.
Click Setup
→Setup Wizard to display the About Setup Wizard screen.
4.
Use the buttons at the bottom of the wizard dialog box to navigate to the procedures you want to perform. The procedures available from the Setup Wizard are:
•
“Entering License Keys” (page 23)
•
Setting up partitions (see
“Creating Partitions” (page 27) ,
, and
“Deleting Partitions” (page 35)
)
•
“Enabling or disabling IPv6 and IPv4 network configuration” (page 39)
•
“Specifying the date and time using the Setup Wizard” (page 42)
Entering License Keys
Enable license keys in the following situations:
•
During initial installation and configuration of the library.
•
During a capacity on demand (COD) or feature upgrade.
•
When enabling ESKM (See
“Enabling the ESKM License Key” (page 210)
for specific instructions.)
If you cannot locate the license instructions shipped with the library, you can obtain them by contacting HP Support.
To enable licenses:
Setup Wizard Prerequisites 23
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
If you are not already working from the physical library, select it from the View menu.
3.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Licenses.
NOTE: To perform this procedure from the Setup Wizard, select Setup
→Setup Wizard, then click Next until the Licenses dialog box appears.
Only run the Setup Wizard to perform initial library configuration. Use the appropriate other menu option to modify the configuration.
The Licenses dialog box appears.
This dialog box lists the licensed features for your library, including their status, expiration date, and quantity. The following guidelines apply to Quantity:
•
The COD quantity is the number of slots licensed.
•
The partition quantity is either 1 or 16. The only possible multiple number of partitions is
16.
•
For features that are not licensed by quantity, such as Automated Media Pool, Quantity is always set to 1.
4.
In the Enter License Key text box, type the appropriate license key.
NOTE: You do not need to highlight the feature before you enter a license key.
License keys are not case-sensitive, so if you are using the library OCP, enter the library key from the lowercase keyboard, which gives you access to the dash (-) character.
If you cannot locate the license instructions shipped with the library, you can obtain them by contacting technical support or, if you are an end user, by contacting your sales representative.
5.
Click OK.
If you have upgraded the library storage capacity, the extra storage slots you just added are not assigned to a partition. You can either create a new partition to include them or manually modify an existing partition to include them by using expert partitioning mode.
NOTE: Command View TL version 2.8 or later must be used to enter the TC347A license key for Command View TL software. Command View TL can also be used to launch the LMC, enter additional license keys, and enable TapeAssure.
For more information, see
“Working With Partitions” (page 25)
.
24 Modifying the Library Configuration
Working With Partitions
A partition is an abstraction of a single underlying physical library that presents the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of file management, access by multiple users, or dedication to one or more host applications. For example, you can choose to run one software application in one partition, and a different software application in a second partition.
Each partition contains the following components of the physical library:
•
Accessor: the robotic assembly that moves media within the library. The accessor includes the picker and reach assemblies.
•
I/E station magazine: a magazine, consisting of slots for cartridges, that enables media to be moved into or removed from the physical library. The type of media determines the number of slots in the magazine. For example, an LTO magazine has six slots.
•
Storage magazine: a static column location within a section of the physical library rack that holds removable media. For more about location coordinates, see
•
Drive: the read/write device for removable media.
A partition consists of, at a minimum, one storage magazine and one drive. Neither the storage magazine nor the drive can be shared with another partition. Each partition is specific to a media type (for example, LTO-4, LTO-5). One 24 slot I/E station can be used by up to four partitions.
One 72 slot I/E station can be used by up to twelve partitions. The maximum number of I/E station slots per partition is 240. The maximum number of partitions is determined by the lesser of either the number of drives available in the physical library (assuming there are at least as many storage slots), or 16.
NOTE: The library is licensed for either one partition or the maximum number of partitions, which is 16.
Using the Secure Manager feature, multiple hosts can share a single partition, or a partition can be restricted to one exclusive host.
Each host application can have a partition assigned to it. Each application uses its partition as if it were a dedicated physical library.
Understanding Partition Media Policy Settings
The partition Media Type Checking Policy and Return Media Identifier settings help determine how the library handles differing media types within the same library. Configure media policy settings when you manually create or modify a partition.
Media Domain
The media domain is the family of all cartridge types that can be stored in the same storage slot.
Typically, a media domain represents all the generations and brands of a particular tape technology.
Linear Tape Open (LTO), for example, has many generations and vendors, but all LTO cartridges are considered to exist in the same media domain.
Media Type
The media type is a particular generation of tape technology. Several media types can exist within one media domain. Using LTO again as an example, within the LTO media domain is the LTO-4 media type, the LTO-5 media type, and so forth. A media type has an identifier, chosen by the tape manufacturer or consortium, that enables users and libraries to distinguish between them. The
LTO consortium uses L4 and L5 to identify the LTO-4 and LTO-5 media types in a volume serial number.
Working With Partitions 25
Media ID Checking
Media ID checking policy restricts the movement of tape cartridges based on the media ID on the barcode label. This policy also helps you monitor the management of tapes and drives by the host applications. When you create or modify a partition, you can enable or disable the Media Type
Checking option. If you choose to enable media type checking, you also can use the Media Checking
Policy option to select from two modes of operation: Required or Not Required. With either mode, the library checks whether a cartridge has a valid media ID on the barcode label.
In Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a cartridge, the library does not allow it to be moved into or within the library. If the library finds a valid media ID, the library allows it to be moved from an I/E station into a partition that contains magazines matching the media domain of the cartridge (for example, LTO), but the library does not allow the cartridge to be moved from storage to a drive that does not have a matching type (for example, an LTO-5 cartridge will not be allowed to move to an LTO-4 drive).
In Not Required mode, if the library does not find a valid media ID on a cartridge, the library allows it to be moved into or within the library as long as the I/E station magazine, storage magazine, or drive matches the media domain of the cartridge. If the library finds a valid media
ID, the library does not allow the cartridge to be moved from storage to a drive that does not have a matching type (for example, an LTO-5 cartridge will not be allowed to move to an LTO-4 drive).
Return Media Identifier
For the media policy settings, the library makes assumptions about a media identifier and its position in a media barcode label. To be considered a media identifier, the identifier characters must be correct for the media domain and media type. Also, the identifier, which for some media types can consist of more than one character, must be complete and in the correct location. The correct characters in the wrong position are not viewed as a media type identifier. In a physical library or partition containing mixed media, the media identifier is not required for all cartridges.
explains the media type identifiers and assumptions.
Table 3 Sampling of Media Type Identifiers
Media Domain
LTO
Media Type
LTO-4
LTO
LTO
LTO
LTO-4 WORM
LTO-5
LTO-5 WORM
Identifier
“L4” as the last two characters in the barcode
“LU” as the last two characters in the barcode
“L5” as the last two characters in the barcode
“LV” as the last two characters in the barcode
With a valid media type identifier present and the Media Type Checking setting enabled, which is the case by default, a host is prevented from executing invalid media moves across differing media types. For example, a host can be prevented from moving LTO-5 media to an LTO-4 drive.
If an invalid move is attempted, the library returns an error to the host.
Returning media identifiers to hosts
With the Return Media Identifier setting, you can control if and where a media type identifier appears in the volume serial number that is returned to the host.
shows an example of how the return media identifier behaves, depending on the setting you choose: Disabled, Prefix, Suffix, and Pass Through. The bold, underlined portion is the media identifier.
26 Modifying the Library Configuration
Table 4 Return Media Identifier Behavior Example
Setting
Disabled
Volume Serial Number Returned to Host
AB1234
Prefix
Suffix
L5AB1234
AB1234L5
Pass Through AB1234L5
1
Based on actual LTO-4 barcode: AB1234L5
1
For more information about configuring the Media Type Checking and Return Media Identifier settings, see
“Creating Partitions” (page 27) .
Working with Library Control Paths
You must define a control path for each library partition. The control path is used to connect a partition to a host application. The ESL G3 does not automatically assign a control path when you create a partition. When selecting a library control path for a partition, you are selecting which tape drive will present (or proxy) the virtual robot LUN to the SAN and hosts.
Creating Partitions
You can create library partitions in the following ways:
•
“Creating Partitions with the Setup Wizard” (page 27)
•
“Creating Partitions Automatically” (page 28)
•
“Creating Partitions Manually Using Simple Mode” (page 28)
•
“Creating Partitions Manually Using Expert Mode” (page 30)
The method you should choose depends on the circumstance and the level of control you want in allocating resources to the partition. In Automatic mode, the library assigns available system resources to create the number of partitions you specify. Automatic mode is not available if a partition already exists. Manual mode enables you to pick specific drives, storage magazines, and magazines within an I/E station to assign to a partition.
If one or more partitions already exist in the library, you must manually create a new partition to allocate drives, storage slots, and I/E station magazines. You have two options to allocate system resources when manually creating a new partition: Simple and Expert modes. In Simple mode, you can specify the quantity of each element you want assigned to the partition. In Expert mode, you can indicate which specific drives, storage magazines, I/E station magazines, or if enabled, extended I/E station magazines to assign to the partition.
NOTE: Make sure that you have adequately planned for the number of partitions that you want to configure.
Creating Partitions with the Setup Wizard
If you are performing an initial configuration of your library, you can use the Setup Wizard to automatically create partitions using the available system resources. See
. Using the Setup Wizard is part of the normal installation procedure for a library.
Working With Partitions 27
NOTE: You should run the Setup Wizard only when you initially configure the library.
The Automatic radio button will be disabled if there are partitions already configured. This indicates that the Setup Wizard has already been run and you should create partitions by using
Setup
→Partitions. See
“Creating Partitions Manually Using Simple Mode” (page 28)
or
Partitions Manually Using Expert Mode” (page 30) .
Creating Partitions Automatically
You can use the library Automatic mode to create partitions within limits based on licensing restrictions and available resources. Automatic mode is available only if no partitions currently exist.
To create partitions automatically:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Ensure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Select Setup
→Setup Wizard, then click Next until the Partitions dialog box appears.
Alternatively, click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box appears.
4.
Click Create.
The Partitions: Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
5.
Select Automatic, and then click Next.
NOTE: Automatic is only available if no partitions currently exist. If it is not available, see
“Creating Partitions Manually Using Simple Mode” (page 28)
or
to create partitions.
The Partitions: Automatic Creation dialog box appears.
6.
In the Partitions column, type the number of partitions you want to create for each media/drive type.
The maximum number of partitions that you can create is determined by the number of partitions you are licensed to create and the number of drives available.
7.
Click Create.
8.
Click Finish.
The Partitions dialog box appears again.
9.
If you are in the Setup Wizard, click Next to continue, or click Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard.
If you are not in the Setup Wizard, click Close.
Creating Partitions Manually Using Simple Mode
In Simple mode, you can specify the quantity of each element you want assigned to the partition.
To create partitions manually using simple mode:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box appears, listing partitions that are currently configured within the library.
28 Modifying the Library Configuration
NOTE: To perform this procedure from the Setup Wizard, select Setup
→Setup Wizard, then click Next until the Partitions dialog box appears.
Only run the Setup Wizard to perform initial library configuration. Use the appropriate other menu option to modify the configuration.
4.
Click Create.
The Partitions: Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
5.
Select Simple, and then click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Partition Properties dialog box appears.
6.
Configure the following settings:
•
In the Name text box, type a name that describes the new partition.
•
From the Drive Domain drop-down list, click the appropriate drive domain.
7.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Policy Settings dialog box appears.
8.
Configure the media type checking and media identifier settings:
•
For Media Type Checking, select either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
•
From the Media Checking Policy drop-down list, click either Required or Not Required.
•
From the Return Media Identifier drop-down list, click either Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled. Depending on which setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the host.
CAUTION: After a media volume serial number has been reported to a host, changing the Return Media Identifier setting could cause the host to not recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see
“Understanding Partition Media
•
For Automatic Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default
Enabling automatic drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning each time a drive requests a cleaning operation. For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must first configure drive cleaning for the library (see
“Configuring Drive Cleaning” (page
).
NOTE: Automatic drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the host application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the library.
9.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Resource Quantities dialog box appears.
10.
Type the number of elements to include in the partition by specifying:
•
Number of drives
•
Number of storage slots
•
Number of I/E slots
Working With Partitions 29
The quantity available for each type of resource indicates resources not yet assigned to existing partitions.
11.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions - Summary Information dialog box appears.
12.
Verify that the parameters you set are correct.
13.
To create the partition, click Create.
NOTE: After you click Create, the Cancel button becomes unavailable.
The Partitions - Completed dialog box appears.
14.
Review the information to make sure it is correct.
15.
If you want to view the drive information after creating the partition, click Next.
16.
Click Finish.
The Partitions dialog box lists the partition you just created.
17.
If you are in the Setup Wizard, click Next to continue to IPv6 Configuration, or click Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard. If you are not in the Setup Wizard, click Close.
Creating Partitions Manually Using Expert Mode
In Expert mode, you can indicate which specific drives, storage magazines, I/E station magazines, or if enabled, extended I/E station magazines to assign to the partition.
To create partitions manually using expert mode:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box displays a list of partitions currently configured within the library.
NOTE: To perform this procedure from the Setup Wizard, select Setup
→Setup Wizard, then click Next until the Partitions dialog box appears.
Only run the Setup Wizard to perform initial library configuration. Use the appropriate other menu option to modify the configuration.
4.
Click Create.
The Partitions: Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
5.
Select Expert, and then click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Partition Properties dialog box appears.
6.
Configure the following settings:
NOTE:
If you are creating an Automated Media Pool (AMP) partition, do the following: a.
Ensure that the AMP license is installed.
b.
Name the partition, select the slot magazines to include in the partition, and select the
I/E station slots to include in the partition.
c.
Go to
.
If you are not creating an AMP, do the following: a.
In the Name text box, type a name to describe the new partition.
b.
From the Drive Domain drop-down list, click the appropriate drive type.
30 Modifying the Library Configuration
7.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Policy Settings dialog box appears.
NOTE: If you are configuring the AMP, all fields are greyed out and do not allow input. Go to
.
8.
Configure the following settings:
•
For Media Type Checking, select either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
•
From the Media Checking Policy drop-down list, click either Required or Not Required.
•
From the Return Media Identifier drop-down list, click either Suffix, Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled. Depending on which setting you choose, you can control the use of the media type identifier in the volume serial number that is returned to the host.
CAUTION: After a media volume serial number has been reported to a host, changing the Return Media Identifier setting could cause the host to not recognize media within the library.
For more information about how media policies work, see
“Understanding Partition Media
•
For Automatic Drive Cleaning, click either Enable or Disable. This setting is enabled by default.
Enabling automatic drive cleaning allows the library to initiate drive cleaning each time a drive requests a cleaning operation. For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must first configure drive cleaning for the library. (See
“Configuring Drive Cleaning” (page
.
NOTE: Automatic drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the host application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the library.
9.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Select Drives dialog box appears.
10.
In the left column, select the location of one or more drives.
Make sure that you select the appropriate module, because the library can have drives in the control module and any of the eleven expansion modules.
11.
To assign a drive to the partition, select the appropriate check box. You can identify a drive by its serial number and location coordinates. For more information, see
Location Coordinates” (page 82)
.
12.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Select Storage Slots dialog box appears.
When you are selecting storage slots to be part of the partition, if you have the AMP license installed you can also add magazine extensions to the partition that can be used to extend the partition for future growth via the AMP partition slots. For each extension you add, the library will report those extensions as inaccessible slots until you assign magazines from the
AMP partitions to this partition.
13.
In the left column, select the location of one or more I/E station magazines.
14.
To assign a storage slot, select the appropriate check box. You can identify a storage slot by its location coordinates. The number of slots available is determined by the drive media type.
Working With Partitions 31
15.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Select I/E Slots dialog box appears.
16.
Select the location of one or more I/E station magazine.
a.
Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the library can have I/E stations in the control module and expansion modules.
b.
To assign an I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. You can identify an I/E station magazine by its location coordinates.
17.
If Control Path Failover (CPF) license is installed, you are able to select which drive will be the CP drive. Do so now.
18.
If Data Path Failover (DPF) license is installed, you are able to select which drive will use DPF.
Do so now.
19.
To continue, click Next.
NOTE: Depending on whether Extended I/E is enabled, Select Extended I/E Slots may appear. See the next step. If Extended I/E is not enabled, go to
To enable Extended I/E, go to Setup
→Physical Library, and select the feature. For more information about Extended I/E, see
“Extended I/E Option” (page 17)
.
20.
In the Partitions: Select Extended I/E Slots dialog box, do the following: a.
In the left column, select the location of one or more Extended I/E station magazines.
b.
To assign an Extended I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. You can identify an I/E station magazine by its location coordinates.
The Partitions - Summary Information dialog box appears.
21.
In the Partitions - Summary Information dialog box, verify that the parameters you set are correct.
22.
To create the partition, click Create.
NOTE: After you click Create, the Cancel button becomes unavailable.
23.
Review the information to make sure it is correct.
24.
If you want to view the drive information after creating the partition, click Next.
25.
Click Finish
The Partitions dialog box lists the partition you just created.
26.
If you are in the Setup Wizard, click Next to continue to IPv6 Configuration, or click Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard. If you are not in the Setup Wizard, click Close.
Modifying Partitions
You can use the Modify process to change the allocation of drives and storage magazines in existing partitions without having to delete the entire partition and then recreate it. You also can use Modify to change partition properties and partition settings.
CAUTION: Modifying partitions improperly, particularly when deleting partition elements, can disrupt host applications.
Before you modify any partitions, understand the configuration changes you plan to make and the potentially disruptive effects that those changes could have on the host applications. Be careful whenever you add or delete partition elements that include drives, storage magazines, and I/E station magazines.
NOTE: A partition with loaded drives cannot be modified.
For best results, follow these guidelines when adding or deleting partition elements:
32 Modifying the Library Configuration
•
Shut down the host application.
•
Update the inventory in the library.
•
Reconfigure the library in the application.
•
Update the inventory in the application.
NOTE: This procedure includes instructions for downloading new drive firmware images. You can modify partitions from either the library OCP or a remote client. However, if you want to download drive firmware images, you must do so from a remote client.
To modify an existing partition:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box appears.
4.
Select the partition you want to change, and then click Modify.
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to modify the partition, requiring the library to be taken offline. Click Yes. No host will be able to access the partition while the library is offline.
The Partitions: Choose Partition Properties dialog box appears.
NOTE: For AMP partitions, you can not modify these properties; all options will be disabled.
5.
To modify the Partition Name, type the appropriate name into the field.
6.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Policy Settings dialog box appears.
NOTE: For AMP partitions, you can not modify these properties; all options will be disabled.
7.
From the Partition dialog box, configure the following: a.
Select the appropriate value from the Media Barcode Label Type Restrictions.
b.
Select the Return Media Identifier.
c.
Enable or disable Automatic Drive Cleaning.
8.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Select Drives dialog box appears.
CAUTION: Deleting segments containing media will leave the media inaccessible unless the segments are re-assigned to another partition.
9.
Select the location of one or more drives.
Make sure that you select the appropriate module because the library can have drives in the control module and in any of the expansion modules.
10.
To add a drive to the partition, select the appropriate drive check box. Delete a drive from the partition by clearing the drive check box. Identify a drive by its serial number and location coordinates.
11.
To continue, click Next.
The Partitions: Select Storage Slots dialog box appears.
When selecting storage slots to be part of the partition, if you have the AMP license installed you can also add magazine extensions to the partition that can be used to extend the partition
Working With Partitions 33
for future growth via the AMP partition slots. For each extension you add, the library will report those extensions as inaccessible slots until you assign magazines from the AMP partitions to this partition.
12.
Select the rack you want to modify.
13.
To add an I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. Delete an I/E station magazine by clearing its check box. Identify an I/E station magazine by its location coordinates.
14.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Select I/E Slots dialog box appears.
15.
Select the location of one or more I/E station magazines.
Select the appropriate module. The library can have I/E stations in the control module and in expansion modules.
16.
To add an I/E station magazine, select the appropriate check box. To delete an I/E station magazine, clear the associated check box. Identify an I/E station magazine by the location coordinates.
17.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Control Path Drive dialog box appears.
18.
Select which drive will be the Control Path Drive.
19.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Control Path Failover Drive dialog box appears.
20.
Select the drive to assign for Control Path Failover.
21.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Choose Data Path Failover Drives dialog box appears.
22.
Select which drives to enable Data Path Failover. Data Path Failover drives must be configured in Fabric mode.
23.
Click Next.
The Partitions: Configure Drive Firmware Autoleveling dialog box appears. To download a new drive firmware image go to the next step, otherwise go to
24.
To download new drive firmware, see
“Updating Drive Firmware” (page 174)
.
25.
To enable autoleveling for the partition, perform the following steps: a.
From the Drive Type drop-down list, click the type of drives that you want to list in the table. Listed drive types use the following format: <vendor>_<product>_<interface>
Drives of the specified type within the partition appear in the table.
b.
In the left-most column of the table in the Selected Drives will be Autoleveled area, select one or more check boxes that correspond to drives that you want to update with the same drive firmware version.
c.
If necessary, download a new Tape Drive Firmware image, click Manage Images, click
Download, select the firmware image (file type .frm), then click Open.
d.
Click the appropriate version in the Select Autolevel Firmware File drop-down list.
26.
Click Next.
The Partitions - Summary Information dialog box appears.
27.
Verify that the parameters you set are correct.
28.
If the summary information is correct, click Modify.
NOTE: After you click Modify, the Cancel button becomes unavailable.
The Partitions - Completed dialog box appears.
34 Modifying the Library Configuration
29.
Review the information to make sure it is correct.
30.
Click Finish.
The Partitions dialog box appears again.
31.
If you are in the Setup Wizard, click Next to continue to IPv6 Configuration, or click Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard. If you are not in the Setup Wizard, click Close.
Data Path Failover for Partitions
Data Path Failover allows an alternate path when a preferred path fails. Only drives configured in Fabric mode are eligible for Data Path Failover.
NOTE: Only LTO-5 drives can be used as Data Path Failover drives.
Data Path Failover shows the current status of each drive is shown:
•
Green — eligible for Data Path Failover.
•
Yellow — Data Path Failover currently enabled.
•
White — no changes have been made.
•
Red — custom mapping has been applied.
To enable Data Path Failover:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Data Path Failover.
The Data Path Failover (DPF) dialog box appears.
3.
Under Data Path Failover Configuration, select the drive(s) you want to enable Data Path
Failover.
4.
Click OK. Data Path Failover is now enabled.
To disable Data Path Failover:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Data Path Failover.
The Data Path Failover (DPF) dialog box appears.
3.
Click OK. Data Path Failover is now disabled.
Deleting Partitions
CAUTION: For the host application to have access to the written data on the partition that you want to delete, you must recreate a partition that includes the same media type, interface, I/E station magazines, and a host at the same LUN.
To delete a partition, perform the following steps:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box appears.
4.
Click the partition you want to delete.
NOTE: You can delete only one partition at a time.
5.
Click Delete. To delete the partition click Yes.
Working With Partitions 35
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take the library offline and delete the partition. Click Yes.
6.
The library deletes the selected partition. Repeat the process to delete another partition, or click Close.
Selecting a partition control path
To select a partition and configure the control path, perform the following steps:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
From the main console, select Setup
→Partitions→Control Path.
The Secure Manager Partitions dialog box appears.
3.
Highlight the partition you want to configure, and click OK.
The Control Path dialog box appears.
4.
Select the drive you want to configure as the control path.
The primary Control Path Drive you selected is highlighted in yellow, and the Enable Control
Path box is selected automatically.
5.
Click OK to finish.
36 Modifying the Library Configuration
NOTE: If the partition is not offline, you will receive a message stating that the partition must be taken offline prior to performing the operation. Ensure backup applications are not currently using the partition. Click Yes to continue.
Automated Media Pool (AMP)
Automated Media Pool (AMP), also referred to as a Library Managed partition in the LMC, enables the creation of a virtual partition that can be dynamically allocated to other, previously-created partitions, all without disrupting host or application operation. AMP magazines are presented to host applications as part of a standard partition, but AMP magazines appear as “inaccessible” until they are assigned to a normal partition.
AMP may be thought of as “thin provisioning” for a tape library. Both a partition license and an
AMP license are required to enable AMP on a library.
An AMP example is shown in the following figure:
In this example, three standard partitions have been created to present to SAN hosts. Partition 4 is a Library Managed (AMP) partition from which slots can be reassigned. As shown in the example, each partition contains 100 physical storage slots. The host application will see each partition as containing a total of 130 storage slots, 30 of which will be tagged as “inaccessible”.
To create an AMP partition:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Configure.
The Partitions dialog box displays a list of partitions currently configured within the library.
4.
Click Create.
The Partitions - Choose Creation Mode dialog box appears.
5.
Select Expert, and then click Next.
The Partitions - Choose Partition Properties dialog box appears.
6.
In the Name box, type a name for the AMP partition.
7.
In the Library Type drop-down box, select Library Managed (AMP) and click Next.
The Partitions - Choose Policy Settings dialog box appears. All options are grayed out for
AMP partitions.
Working With Partitions 37
8.
Click Next.
The Partitions - Select Storage Slots dialog box appears.
9.
Select the slots that you want to become part of this AMP partition and click Next.
The Partitions - Summary Information screen appears.
10.
Click Create to create the new AMP partition.
To display a color-coded view of your partitions, drives, and media, click Tools
→Library
Explorer
→Partition View.
Assigning slot magazines from an AMP partition to a standard partition will make those slots accessible to host applications that are using the standard partition. You can also reverse the operation and assign magazines from a standard partition to an AMP partition.
To dynamically assign AMP magazines:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Automated Media Pool→Assign Magazines.
The Assign Magazines: Select Partitions dialog box appears.
4.
Select the partition that you want to remove magazines from, and select the partition that you want to assign magazines to. Then click OK.
The final Assign Magazines dialog box appears.
5.
Select the magazine segments that you want to assign to the selected partition and click OK to complete the operation.
Any magazines assigned to a standard partition are now accessible to host applications. Any magazines assigned to an AMP partition are presented as part of standard partitions to host applications but are tagged as “inaccessible” as previously described.
To display a color-coded view of your partitions, drives, and media, click Tools
→Library
Explorer
→Partition View.
Media cannot be moved directly from a standard partition to another standard partition. However,
AMP can be used as a staging area to allow for media to be moved between standard partitions.
All of this can be performed via the GUI, no physical intervention is needed.
To move (or “assign”) media to or from an AMP partition:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Partitions→Automated Media Pool→Assign Media.
The Assign Media: Select Partitions dialog box appears.
4.
Select the partition that you want to remove media from, and select the partition that you want to assign or move media to. Then click OK.
The final Assign Media from... dialog box appears.
5.
Select the media that you want to move and click OK.
The media you selected is moved to the specified partition and the dialog box closes.
To display a color-coded view of your partitions, drives, and media, click Tools
→Library
Explorer
→Partition View.
38 Modifying the Library Configuration
Enabling or disabling IPv6 and IPv4 network configuration
Selecting Enable IPv6 and clicking Next displays the Configure Hostname dialog that you use to specify a library name for connecting to the library remotely. See
for more information about IPv6 network configuration.
Selecting Disable IPv6 and clicking Next displays the Network Configuration dialog that you use to specify the IPv4 host and port settings. See
“Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration” (page 39)
for more information about IPv4 network configuration.
Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration
After completing steps 1 through 3 of
“Setting up the Network Configuration” (page 43)
, the IPv4
Network Configuration dialog box appears.
1.
Use
to assist you in completing the elements on the IPv4 Network
Configuration dialog box.
Table 5 IPv4 Network Configuration Information
Description Element
In the Host Settings area:
DHCP If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled on your network, select Enable to have DHCP automatically configure the library network settings.
Enabling or disabling IPv6 and IPv4 network configuration 39
Table 5 IPv4 Network Configuration Information (continued)
Element
Library Name
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Description
Enable makes the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway text boxes unavailable. Select Disable to make the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway text boxes available for you to manually set the library network settings.
The network name that you want to assign to the library.
The IP address of the library. This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
The subnet mask. This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
The IP address of the default gateway for your portion of the Ethernet network. This text box is available only if DHCP is disabled.
In the Port Settings area:
Auto Negotiate
Speed
Select Enable to have the library automatically negotiate port speeds. Enable makes the Speed options unavailable. Select Disable to make the Speed options available for you to manually set the port speed.
The port speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps). Speed options are available only if Auto Negotiate is disabled.
The Cycle button enables you to cycle the external Ethernet interface without rebooting the library.
2.
Make the appropriate network configuration changes, and then click OK.
A message appears that informs you that network connectivity will be lost temporarily, and asks whether you want to proceed.
3.
Click Yes.
Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration
After completing steps 1 through 3 of
“Setting up the Network Configuration” (page 43) , the Static
IP tab of the IPv6 Network Configuration dialog box appears:
1.
Use the Static IP tab to disable or to enable and specify a static IP address. Valid static IP addresses include link local, site local, and global unchaste.
2.
Click DHCP to display the DHCP tab.
40 Modifying the Library Configuration
3.
As prompted, use the DHCP tab to enable or disable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) auto configuration function.
4.
Click Hostname to display the Hostname tab.
5.
Use the Hostname tab to specify a library name that can be used for remote connections to the library.
6.
Click Settings to display the Settings tab.
7.
Use the Settings tab to view the current IPv6 configuration settings.
8.
After you make the appropriate network configuration changes, click OK.
A prompt appears informing you that network connectivity will be temporarily lost and asks whether you want to proceed.
9.
Click Yes.
Enabling or disabling IPv6 and IPv4 network configuration 41
Setting the network configuration using the Setup Wizard
You can only set up your network configuration from the OCP. If you have already configured the library, do not use the Setup Wizard to reconfigure your settings.
Ensure that your library is attached to the network before you use the Network Configuration command.
To complete the network portion of the Setup Wizard:
1.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Setup Wizard.
Navigate to the network portion of the setup wizard.
2.
If necessary, contact the network administrator to find out if DHCP is enabled on the network, then perform one of the following:
•
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled on your network, select Enable.
DHCP automatically configures the library network settings.
•
If you do not have DHCP enabled on your network, select Disable and type the library name, IP address, subnet mask, and the IP address of the default gateway for your network.
3.
Under Port Settings, choose to enable or disable Auto Negotiate.
•
If Auto Negotiate is enabled, the Port Speed defaults to 100.
•
If Auto Negotiate is disabled, select a Port Speed.
4.
Click OK.
Configuring the host name using the Setup Wizard
NOTE: Only run the Setup Wizard to perform initial library configuration. Thereafter, use the procedure
“Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration” (page 40)
to reconfigure the host name.
To configure the IPv6 host name:
1.
Select Setup
→Setup Wizard, then click Next until the Configure Hostname dialog box appears.
2.
Type the name that can be used to connect to the library remotely.
3.
Click Next.
Specifying the date and time using the Setup Wizard
If NTP is enabled, you can complete the date and time in the Setup Wizard:
1.
To use NTP, in NTP Setting, click Enable. The default setting is Disable.
•
If you choose to use NTP, you must provide valid IP addresses that are accessible from the library. You have the option of using one or two IP addresses.
•
If NTP is enabled and you no longer want to use this setting, click Disable. If you do not use NTP, you must manually set the date and time.
2.
Use the Date drop-down lists to select the month, date, and year.
3.
Use the Time drop-down lists to select the hour, minute, and, whether the time is A.M. or P.M.
4.
In the Time Zone drop-down list, select the appropriate time zone.
The default time zone is GMT. The time zone that you select appears only on your library information panel. Regardless of your selection, the system operates on the GMT zone.
5.
Click OK.
Specifying the Date and Time
To set the date and time or use NTP:
42 Modifying the Library Configuration
You can use the Date and Time command to set or reset the system time. If you want to synchronize the library over a network, you can use the Network Time Protocol (NTP) setting. The default date and time is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Date and Time.
The Date and Time dialog box appears.
4.
In the NTP Setting: section:
•
If you choose to enable NTP, click Enable, otherwise continue with the next step to manually set the date and time.
The Date and Time sections of the dialog box are grayed out.
•
Type valid IP addresses for the Primary Server and optionally the Secondary Server.
•
If the DNS Server has not been configured in the LMC, type valid numeric IP addresses that are accessible from the library (example 111.11.11.111). You have the option of using one or two IP addresses.
•
If the DNS Server has been configured through the LMC (Setup
→DNS Configuration), type the valid alpha/numeric IP Addresses that are accessible from the library. You have the option of using one or two IP addresses.
•
If NTP is enabled and you no longer want to use this setting, click Disable.
5.
Use the Date drop-down lists to select the month, date, and year.
6.
Use the Time drop-down lists to select the hour, minute, and whether the time is A.M. or P.M.
7.
Use the Time Zone drop-down list to select the appropriate time zone.
NOTE: The default time zone is GMT. The time zone that you select appears only on your library information panel. Regardless of your selection, the system operates on the GMT zone.
8.
Click OK.
Filling the library with cartridges (bulk loading)
Before your library is operational, place cartridges into the slots of the magazines lining the interior of your library.
•
Make certain the barcode side is facing out of the slot.
•
Make certain that the cartridge is completely seated in the slot. Accessor motion can be impeded if the cartridge is not completely seated within the slot.
•
You should not be able to see the name of the media type typically printed on the top of the cartridge by the manufacturer.
When your library is operational, use the I/E Station to add additional cartridges. Insert the cartridges in the slots of the I/E Station. Then use Operations
→Import to import the cartridges.
Setting up the Network Configuration
Make sure that your library is attached to the network before you use the Network
Configuration command.
CAUTION: You must fully understand all network issues before you change the network configuration for an already configured library. It is recommended that you consult with your network administrator before changing your network configuration.
Filling the library with cartridges (bulk loading) 43
NOTE: To set up an IPv6 network connection, make sure that the IPv6 option is enabled on the
Physical Library dialog box.
To set up the network configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
If you are not already working from the physical library, select the physical library from the
View menu.
3.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Network Configuration→Network Configuration.
4.
Depending on whether IPv6 is enabled or disabled and the protocol of the network connection you want to configure:
•
If IPv6 is disabled, the IPv4 Network Configuration dialog box appears.
Proceed to
“Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration” (page 39)
.
•
If IPv6 is enabled, but you want to configure an IPv4 connection, click IPv4 Configuration on the Network Configuration submenu to display the IPv4 Network Configuration dialog.
Proceed to
“Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration” (page 39)
.
•
If IPv6 is enabled and you want to configure an IPv6 connection, click IPv6 Configuration on the Network Configuration submenu to display the IPv6 Network Configuration dialog.
Proceed to
“Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration” (page 40)
.
NOTE: The Network Configuration submenu only appears if you have enabled IPv6 for the physical library.
After you set up the network configuration, see the following topics:
•
“Setting up IPv4 Network Configuration” (page 39)
•
“Setting up IPv6 Network Configuration” (page 40)
Changing internal IP network addressing
You can use the LMC to change the internal IP address of the library and other library security settings, including enabling or disabling network services, enabling or disabling remote access to the library, setting up firewall access for server callbacks to remote clients, and enabling or disabling
SNMP or SMI-S access.
The default internal network subnet setting for the ESL G3 library is 10.10.X.X. Attaching the library to a 10.10.X.X external network can cause library and network problems. The Change Internal IP dialog box enables you to change the library internal IP addressing so that conflicts do not occur.
This dialog box is accessible only from the library OCP.
•
You only need to change the default internal IP setting if your external network is 10.10.X.X.
•
Do not set up internal IP addressing to conflict with existing external IP addressing. If you set up the same IP subnet for both the internal and external IP networks (for example, 10.10.X.X), the library will become unusable.
•
If you change the internal IP addressing, and then later on a user uses the Network
Configuration dialog box (Setup
→Network Configuration) to assign to the library a static IP address that conflicts with the internal network, the assignment request will fail and the library will issue an event.
•
If you change the internal IP addressing, and then later on a user uses the Network
Configuration dialog box (Setup
→Network Configuration) to assign to the library a static IP
44 Modifying the Library Configuration
address that conflicts with the internal network, the assignment request will fail and the library will issue an event.
•
If you change the internal IP addressing, and if Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled and DHCP assigns to the library an IP address that conflicts with the internal network, address conflicts could occur between internal library devices and external customer devices and the library will issue an event.
To change the Internal IP Network Addressing:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
Click Setup
→Network Configuration→Network Configuration.
3.
Type the appropriate value into the IP Address field.
4.
To change any other settings, type the appropriate values into the corresponding fields and select or clear the appropriate radio boxes.
A Warning message appears, explaining that you are changing the network configuration from a remote client, and that the connection to the library will be lost until you restart the remote client.
5.
If you are sure that you want to make the change, click Yes. If you are unsure about whether the change is appropriate, click No.
6.
After the library processes the request successfully, a message appears that asks you whether you want to shut down the library. You must shut down and restart the library.
Configuring DNS
If DHCP is disabled, you can specify primary and secondary Domain Name System (DNS servers).
DNS servers provide IP address resolution of fully qualified domain names. DNS settings are optional.
CAUTION: You must fully understand all network issues before you change the network configuration for an already configured library. It is recommended that you consult with your network administrator before changing your network configuration.
To view the DNS server:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
If you are not already working from the physical library, select the physical library from the
View menu.
3.
Click Setup
→Network Configuration→DNS Configuration.
4.
Type the IP addresses of the primary, secondary (optional), and tertiary (optional) DNS servers to be used.
When you make a change to the current values, the OK button becomes active.
5.
Click OK to accept the new values and exit the dialog box.
Setting up Network Security
To set up network security:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
If you are not already working from the physical library, select the physical library from the
View menu.
3.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Network Configuration→Network Security Settings.
4.
To select services to enable or disable: a.
Click the Services tab.
Available services are:
Configuring DNS 45
•
Network Interface
•
ICMP
•
SSH
•
SSHv1
•
CLI
•
HTTP b.
For each of the services listed, select the radio button to enable or disable the service.
c.
Click Apply.
d.
Read the text in the Attention dialog box, then click Yes.
e.
Click OK to exit the Security Configuration dialog box, or select another tab to continue configuration.
5.
To configure security settings on the LMC: a.
Click the LMC tab.
b.
In the Remote Access section, enable or disable by selecting the appropriate radio button, then select or clear the box to indicate whether or not to Use SSL.
c.
In the Callback section, type in the starting and ending port ranges.
d.
In the Remove Service Login section, enable or disable the feature by selecting the appropriate radio button.
e.
In the Session section, select the appropriate timeout value (in minutes) by using the scrolling buttons next to the timeout field or by typing in the value.
f.
Click Apply.
g.
Read the text in the Attention dialog box, then click Yes.
h.
Click OK to exit the Security Configuration dialog box, or select another tab to continue configuration.
6.
To configure the SNMP/SMI-S security settings: a.
Click the SNMP/SMI-S tab.
b.
In the SMI-S section, enable either SMI-S or Secure SMI-S by selecting the appropriate radio button.
c.
In the SNMP section, enable or disable SNMP encryption by selecting the appropriate radio button, then either select or clear the box to indicate whether to Enable SNMP v1 and v2.
d.
Click Apply.
e.
Read the text in the Attention dialog box, then click Yes.
f.
Click OK to exit the Security Configuration dialog box, or select another tab to continue configuration.
7.
Read the text in the Attention dialog box, then click either Yes or No.
Setting up Drives
NOTE: Drives must be offline and unloaded before changing settings.
To setup drive settings, perform the following:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Drive Settings.
The Drive Settings dialog box appears.
3.
Select the drive you want to configure.
4.
Select the speed of the drive from the Speed drop-down menu.
46 Modifying the Library Configuration
5.
Select the topology of the drive from the Topology drop-down menu.
If the topology is set to Loop, configure the Loop ID.
NOTE: Drives configured for data path failover must be set to Fabric mode.
6.
Click OK.
Configuring E-mail
The library uses the e-mail settings on the Email Configuration dialog box whenever library e-mail services are used, such as when you use the Send command to e-mail support events or logs and when the library automatically sends e-mail notifications of library problems.
Setting Up or Changing the E-Mail Configuration
To set up or change the e-mail configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Notifications→SMTP Email Configuration.
The SMTP Email Configuration dialog box appears.
4.
In the SMTP Server text box, type the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the SMTP server (for example,
192.16.96.201
).
CAUTION: You must identify the SMTP server by its server address.
5.
If your SMTP server requires authentication of accounts and passwords, select Password in the Authentication field.
If your SMTP does not require authentication, select None.
NOTE: The Account and Password text boxes are not available if None is selected in the
Authentication field.
a.
In the Account text box, type the name of a valid account on the SMTP server (for example,
Jay.User
).
b.
In the Password text box, type the password for the account that you specified in the
Account field.
Configuring E-mail 47
6.
In the Sender Address text box, type an e-mail address for the library (for example, [email protected]
).
The library uses this address in the From field of e-mail messages that it sends out, indicating the originator of the message. If you type, for example, eslg3, the library appends the domain information (for example, @mycompany.com). If you type, for example, [email protected]
, the library does not append any additional information.
7.
To test the e-mail configuration, type an e-mail address in the Recipient box of the Test Current
Configuration area and click Test email.
8.
Confirm that the library displays a message indicating that the test completed successfully, and that the library sends a test message to the specified e-mail address.
The subject of the test message should be Test email from ESL G3 Library. and the message text should include the library name, version, and serial number, along with the date and time that the message was sent.
9.
To finish, click OK.
Testing the Current E-Mail Configuration
To test the current e-mail configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Notifications→Email Configuration.
The SMTP Email Configuration dialog box appears.
4.
Type an e-mail address in the Recipient box of the Test Current Configuration area and click
Test email.
5.
Confirm that the library displays a message indicating that the test completed successfully, and that the library sends a test message to the specified e-mail address.
The subject of the test message should be Test email from ESL G3 Library. and the message text should include the library name, version, and serial number, along with the date and time that the message was sent.
6.
Click OK to close the Email Configuration dialog box.
Setting Up E-mail Notifications
Before you set up notifications, you must configure e-mail in the LMC so that the library can send notifications to the recipients. See
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47)
.
describes the severity levels for which the library can send notifications if e-mail addresses are set up appropriately to receive them.
Table 6 Severity Levels Assigned to Issues:
Severity Level
1 (Failed)
2 (Degraded)
Description
Indicates that a failure has occurred or a different serious condition exists within a library subsystem that requires immediate corrective action. In most cases, a hardware component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed. Typical library operations are either impossible or highly unreliable.
Examples of failure situations include a FRU that is not functioning, a temperature threshold that has been reached that causes unreliable operations, or a partition that the library has automatically taken offline.
Indicates that a degraded condition exists within a library subsystem that impacts system performance or redundancy. Typical library
48 Modifying the Library Configuration
Table 6 Severity Levels Assigned to Issues: (continued)
Severity Level
3 (Warning)
Description operations can continue without immediate corrective action, but an administrator should investigate the condition and correct the problem soon.
An example of a degraded situation is a redundant power supply that has failed.
Indicates that a condition exists within a library subsystem that has little effect on system operations. Typical library operations can continue without immediate corrective action, but you should investigate the condition and correct the problem when possible.
Warnings also can provide helpful information, such as indicating that a door is open.
Examples of warning situations include a FRU that is functioning less reliably, or a temperature threshold that has been reached that does not affect reliable operations.
The body text in the e-mail notification provides details about the issue and library conditions at the time of the event. The e-mail notification also includes an attachment, referred to as a repair page, that provide a problem description and corrective actions you or a customer service engineer
(CSE) can perform. For more information about e-mail notifications, see
.
To set up e-mail recipients for notifications, perform the following steps:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Notifications→System Setup.
The System Setup Notifications dialog box appears with the Contact Information tab displayed.
4.
Enter the contact information you want included in an e-mail notification if an error occurs in the library.
Setting Up E-mail Notifications 49
5.
Click OK.
A message is displayed asking you to perform a Save Configuration operation.
6.
Click Yes.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
7.
Click Save and then save the file to a desired location.
The configuration is saved.
8.
Click Close to close the Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box.
9.
Setup the rules.
a.
Click Setup
→Notifications→System Setup.
The System Setup Notifications dialog box appears with the Contact Information tab displayed.
Click the Rules tab.
This dialog box shows all notification recipients that are set up currently in the LMC.
The remaining steps in this procedure guide you through setting up new e-mail notification recipients. To delete an existing e-mail address, click the e-mail address in the Send Email To column, and then click Delete.
10.
To set up a new e-mail notification recipient, click Create.
The New Email Notification dialog box appears.
50 Modifying the Library Configuration
11.
In the Email Address text box, type the e-mail address that you want to receive notifications.
NOTE: Do not enter more than one address in the Email Address text box.
12.
In the Choose Severity box, click the severity level you want to assign to this e-mail address.
NOTE: If you are using the remote client LMC, you can assign more than one severity level.
While pressing the CTRL key, click the severity levels you want to assign. The OCP on the library enables you to select only one severity level.
13.
To accept this notification setup, click OK.
The System Setup Notification dialog box reappears.
14.
After you finish setting up all notifications, click OK.
Setting Up Media Security Notifications
After the Media Security Notification is set up and the physical library allows automatic inventory, you are notified when media is moved in or out of your library, either intentionally or unintentionally.
Follow the steps below to set media security notification.
To setup media security notifications, perform the following:
1.
Logon as administrator.
2.
Click Setup
→Notifications→Media Security.
The Media Security Notifications dialog box appears.
Setting Up Media Security Notifications 51
3.
Check which media security option you wish to enable.
4.
Click OK.
5.
From the main console, select Setup
→Library Settings→Library Behavioral Settings.
The Library Behavioral Settings dialog box appears.
6.
For Automatic Inventory, click Enable.
7.
Click OK to apply the new settings.
8.
Once the configuration has been successfully saved, click OK.
Setting up Advanced Reporting Options
Reports let you see information about your library at a glance, and help you identify trends and changes over time. You can manually generate reports as needed. The LMC can automatically generate reports and e-mail them to designated recipients at specified times.
52 Modifying the Library Configuration
NOTE: The Advanced reporting feature is available via remote access only.
The LMC can automatically generate and e-mail the Events Report.
To automatically generate reports, set up one or more scheduled jobs using advanced reporting options. You can specify when and how often the report is generated, what report templates are used, and which e-mail recipients receive the report. You can also edit and delete scheduled jobs.
NOTE: To automatically send reports to recipients, the library must be configured for sending e-mail. For more information, see
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47)
.
Saving Report Criteria Templates
To schedule a job for a report, that report must have at least one template. A template is a saved set of report criteria that customize the content and appearance of a report.
Before setting up advanced reporting options, use the Report Criteria dialog box to save one or more templates for each report you want to automatically generate.
To save report criteria templates:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Events.
The Events Reports dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the report.
For more information about choosing report criteria, see
“Generating the Events Report” (page
.
NOTE: To save a template you must customize the Specify Report Criteria information.
3.
Under Templates, click Save.
4.
Type a name for the template, and then click OK.
The template appears in the list under Templates.
5.
To close the Events Report dialog box, click Cancel.
Scheduling a New Job
To set up a report to be automatically generated, first schedule a new job, and then set job options.
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Reporting Options.
The Reporting Options dialog box appears.
Setting up Advanced Reporting Options 53
2.
Click New.
The Create New Job dialog box appears with the Calendar tab selected.
3.
Specify time and recurrence options:
•
Under Start Date, click the day, month, and year when you want the report to be generated for the first time. (The current date is selected by default.)
•
Under Specify the Hour to Run, click the value that corresponds to the time of day when you want the report to be generated. (The values in the list correspond to a 24-hour clock.
For example, 0 is midnight, 10 is 10:00 a.m., and 20 is 8:00 p.m.)
•
(Optional) Select the Recurring Job check box, and then under Frequency click how often you want the report to be generated.
4.
Click the Reports tab, and then add one or more reports to the job.
•
To add a report, click a report in the reports list, and then click a template in the templates list. Click Add to add the report to the job. (You can add more than one report to a job.)
•
If you need to remove a report from a job, click the report, and then click Remove.
•
If there are no templates available for the report you choose, you need to save a template for the report before you can schedule a job. For more information on saving a template, see
“Saving a Report Template” (page 128) .
54 Modifying the Library Configuration
5.
Click the Recipients tab, and then add one or more e-mail recipients to the job.
•
To add a recipient, type an e-mail address in the box, and then click Add. (You can add more than one recipient to a job.)
•
If you need to remove a recipient from a job, click the recipient, and then click Remove.
6.
Click OK.
The new job appears in the list of scheduled jobs. The LMC will generate the report at the specified time and send it to the designated e-mail recipients.
NOTE: If a yellow caution icon appears next to a scheduled job on the Reporting Options dialog box, it means there is a problem with the job. For example, the date for the job might be in the past. To correct the problem, edit the job to change job options. For more information about editing scheduled jobs, see
“Editing Scheduled Jobs” (page 55) .
7.
Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
Editing Scheduled Jobs
If you need to make changes to a scheduled job, edit it to change job options. You can change any job options, such as the date, time, report template, or e-mail recipients.
To edit scheduled jobs:
Setting up Advanced Reporting Options 55
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Reporting Options.
The Reporting Options dialog box appears.
2.
Under Scheduled Jobs, click the job you want to change, and then click Edit.
The Edit Job dialog box appears.
3.
Change job options as needed on the Calendar, Reports, and Recipients tabs.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
NOTE: If the start date for a scheduled job is in the past, and it is not a recurring job, the report will not be generated. To correct this problem, edit the scheduled job and choose a start date that is in the future.
Deleting Scheduled Jobs
If you no longer need a scheduled job, you can delete it.
To delete scheduled jobs:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Reporting Options.
The Reporting Options dialog box appears.
2.
Under Scheduled Jobs, click the job you want to delete, and then click Delete.
A dialog box appears asking if you are sure you want to delete the selected job.
3.
Click Yes.
The job is deleted from the list of scheduled jobs.
4.
Click Close to close the Reporting Options dialog box.
Configuring Drive Cleaning
When you create or modify a partition, you can specify that tape drives in that partition be automatically cleaned each time the drive requests a cleaning operation.
For automatic drive cleaning to function, you must configure drive cleaning for the library. To configure drive cleaning, first assign cleaning magazines, and then import cleaning media.
Designated cleaning media can also be used when manually cleaning drives. (Cleaning magazines and media are not part of any logical partition, and so are not visible to the host application.)
If cleaning magazines are no longer needed, you can unassign them. In addition, you can export expired cleaning media to remove it from the library.
NOTE: Automatic drive cleaning should be enabled for partitions only if the host application does not support the coordination of drive cleaning. If drive cleaning functionality is enabled on the host application, do not enable automatic drive cleaning for any partitions in the library.
For more information about enabling automatic drive cleaning for a partition, see
. For more information about manually cleaning drives, see
.
Assigning Cleaning Magazines and Importing Cleaning Media
To configure the library for drive cleaning, first assign one or more magazines as cleaning magazines, and then import cleaning media.
NOTE: At least one magazine must be assigned for cleaning before you can import cleaning media. Also, only magazines that do not belong to a partition can be assigned for cleaning.
To configure the library for drive cleaning:
56 Modifying the Library Configuration
1.
Insert one or more pieces of cleaning media into the I/E station and close the I/E station door.
Use a standard barcode label for cleaning media. Barcode numbers do not require a specific prefix or suffix.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
On the menu bar, click Setup
→Library Settings→Drive Cleaning.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears.
4.
Click a magazine slot or a piece of media to select it.
Details about the selected slot or media appear under Information, including the type of media, barcode number, location, and the number of times the media has been mounted in a drive.
NOTE: On a remote client LMC, right-click a magazine slot or a piece of cleaning media to see a menu of available options.
5.
If the library has more than one module, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous module.
6.
To assign a magazine for cleaning, click any slot in the magazine to select it. Click Menu, and then click Assign magazine for cleaning.
The magazine is assigned for cleaning.
7.
Repeat this step to assign additional cleaning magazines.
Configuring Drive Cleaning 57
8.
To import cleaning media, click the cleaning media in the I/E station to select it, and then do one of the following:
•
To import only the selected piece of media, click Menu, and then click Import <barcode number> as cleaning media.
•
To import all media in the selected I/E station magazine, click Menu, and then click
Import all tapes in magazine as cleaning media.
The cleaning media is moved to an available cleaning magazine and can be used for automatic or manual cleaning.
9.
Click Close to close the Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box.
Exporting Cleaning Media
Cleaning media can be used a limited number of times. If a piece of media is expired, export it and remove it from the library.
To export cleaning media:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
On the menu bar, click Setup
→Library Settings→Drive Cleaning.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears. If the library has more than one module, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous module.
To determine if a piece of cleaning media has been used the maximum number of times, click the media to select it, and then check the Mount Count value under Information.
3.
Click the cleaning media in a cleaning magazine to select it, and then do one of the following:
•
To export only the selected piece of media, click Menu, and then click Export cleaning media <barcode number>.
•
To export all media in the selected magazine, click Menu, and then click Export all cleaning media in magazine.
The cleaning media is moved to an available I/E station magazine.
4.
Click Close to close the Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box.
Unassigning a Cleaning Magazine
If a magazine is no longer needed for holding cleaning media, first export all cleaning media from the magazine, and then unassign it.
To unassign a cleaning magazine:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
On the menu bar, click Setup
→Library Settings→Drive Cleaning.
The Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box appears. If the library has more than one module, click the arrow buttons to display the next or previous module.
3.
If the magazine you want to unassign contains cleaning media, export all cleaning media to the I/E station.
For more information on exporting cleaning media, see
“Exporting Cleaning Media” (page
.
4.
Click any slot in the cleaning magazine to select it.
5.
Click Menu, and then click Unassign magazine for cleaning.
The magazine is no longer assigned for cleaning.
6.
Click Close to close the Drive Cleaning Configuration dialog box.
58 Modifying the Library Configuration
NOTE: If you try to unassign a cleaning magazine that contains cleaning media, a message appears asking if you are sure you want to continue. If you click Yes, any media in the magazine is not accessible until you add the magazine to a partition or assign it again as a cleaning magazine.
Registering SNMP Traps
Because the library ignores all SNMP SET operations, external management applications cannot register themselves to receive SNMP traps from the library. The Trap Registration dialog box enables you to manually register external applications.
Registering an Application
To register an application:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Notifications→SNMP Trap Registration.
The SNMP Trap Registration dialog box appears.
4.
In the Host/IP text box, type the IPv4 or IPv6 address or host name of the host client running the external application.
5.
In the Port text box, type the number of the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port that you want to associate with the IP address or host name.
6.
In the Community String text box, type the desired community string for the trap that will be sent to the receiver.
7.
Click Create.
The host application IP address or name and UDP port number appear in the table to indicate that the application is registered to receive SNMP traps from the library.
Removing an Application Trap Registration
To remove an application trap registration:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→Notifications→SNMP Trap Registration.
The SNMP Trap Registration dialog box appears.
4.
Click the IP address of the application for which you want to remove trap registration to highlight it.
5.
Click Delete.
Using the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard
Secure Manager provides an additional level of security that allows you to control access to the tape library by authorizing specific servers to access the library's drives and robotics. Secure
Manager increases backup reliability by blocking disruptive traffic from unauthorized hosts to the library, which is one of the main causes of failed or incomplete backups.
Secure Manager has three modes of operation:
1.
Disabled: All hosts have access to all drives and robotics in the library. Switch-based SAN zoning must be used to control access.
2.
Enabled, Basic: If a Secure Manager license key is not installed, only Basic mode is offered.
In this mode, a single access group can be created. Hosts added to the access group have
Registering SNMP Traps 59
access to all drives and robotics in the library. Hosts that are not added to the access group cannot access drives or robotics in the library.
3.
Enabled, Advanced/Licensed: When a Secure Manager license is purchased (per library) and the license key is installed, many access groups can be created. Different sets of hosts and drives can be added to different access groups, providing the highest level of granularity and access control.
The Secure Manager Configuration Wizard guides you through all access control configuration steps: Host Configuration, Access Group Configuration, and Host Access Configuration.
To enable or disable secure manager, perform the following:
1.
Select Setup
→Secure Manager to display the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
Initially, the only option available is Enable/Disable Secure Manager.
3.
Click the radio button next to Enable/Disable Secure Manager.
4.
Select the box beneath the radio button to enable Secure Manager. Clear the box to disable
Secure Manager.
5.
Click Finish.
6.
To perform other tasks related to Secure Manager, see the following procedures:
•
“Using the Host Configuration Option” (page 60)
•
“Using the Access Group Configuration Option” (page 61)
•
“Using the Host Access Configuration Option” (page 62)
Using the Host Configuration Option
To create new hosts that are not physically connected to the SAN, delete hosts that are not longer physically connected to the SAN, or select the ports hosts will use to access devices, use the Host
Configuration Option. To do so:
1.
Select Setup
→Secure Manager to display the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Click the radio button to select Host Configuration.
4.
Click Next to display the Select Hosts Configuration Options screen.
5.
To create a host: a.
Click the radio button to select Create Host.
b.
Click Next to display the Create New Host dialog box.
c.
Type an appropriate value into the Name field.
d.
Select the operating system of the host from the Type field pull-down menu.
e.
Type the port number into the Port field.
f.
Type the world wide path name into the WWPN field.
The string must be 8 hexadecimal numbers, a colon (:), and 8 hexadecimal numbers
(########:########).
g.
Click Finish to create the host.
h.
Click OK in the The Host was created successfully dialog box.
6.
To modify an existing host: a.
Click the radio button to select Modify Host.
b.
Click to appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to modify.
c.
Click Next to access the Modify Existing Host dialog box, which displays current information for the host.
d.
Correct the information in the Name, Type, Port, and WWPN fields.
e.
Click Finish to save the modifications.
60 Modifying the Library Configuration
f.
Click OK in the The Host was modified successfully dialog box.
7.
To delete an existing host: a.
Click the radio button to select Delete Host.
b.
Click to appropriate box in the Select column to select the host to delete.
c.
Click Next to access the Modify Existing Host dialog box, which displays current information for the host.
d.
Click Finish to delete the host.
e.
Click OK in the The Host was deleted successfully dialog box.
8.
If necessary, click Cancel then Yes to exit the dialog box.
Using the Access Group Configuration Option
To create or delete access control groups, or to add hosts to groups or remove hosts from groups, use the Access Group Configuration option. To do so:
1.
Select Setup
→Secure Manager to display the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Click the radio button to select Access Group Configuration.
4.
Click Next to display the Welcome to the Host Access Group Configuration Wizard screen.
5.
Click Next.
6.
To create a new group: a.
Select the Create New Host Access Group radio button.
b.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access Name dialog box.
c.
Type the appropriate value into the Group Name field.
d.
Click Next.
e.
Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to include in the group, or select the Select All Hosts box to include all of the hosts in the group.
f.
Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog box.
g.
Select the box in the Select column to indicate which drive or drives on the selected hosts to include in the group.
h.
For each drive selected, also select the appropriate box in either the Port A or Port B columns to indicate which port to use. (The default is Port A.) i.
Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access dialog box.
j.
Select the box or boxes in the Select column to indicate which partitions to configure for host access.
k.
For each partition selected, also select the appropriate box in either the Port A or Port B columns to indicate which port to use. (The default is Port A.) l.
Click Finish to create the new access group.
m. Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog box.
7.
To change the name of an access group: a.
Select the Change Access Group name radio button.
b.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
c.
Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
d.
Select the box corresponding to the Access Group name to change.
e.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access Name dialog box.
f.
Type the appropriate value into the Group Name field.
g.
Click Finish to exit the dialog box.
8.
To delete an existing host access group: a.
Select the Delete Host Access Group radio button.
Using the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard 61
b.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
c.
Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
d.
Select the box corresponding to the Access Group to delete.
e.
Click Next to display the Warning dialog box.
f.
Click Yes to delete the Access Group.
g.
Click OK in the The Group Access was deleted successfully dialog box.
9.
To add a host or hosts to a host access group: a.
Select the Add Host to Group radio button.
b.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
c.
Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
d.
Select the box corresponding to the Access Group to modify.
e.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Add dialog box.
f.
Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to add to the group, or select the Select All Hosts box to add all of the hosts in the group.
g.
Click Finish to save the modification.
h.
Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog box.
10. To remove a host from a host access group: a.
Select the Remove Host from Group radio button.
b.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access dialog box.
c.
Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
d.
Select the box corresponding to the Access Group from which to remove the host.
e.
Click Next to display the Select Group Access Hosts to Remove dialog box.
f.
Select the box in the Select column to indicate which host or hosts to remove from the group, or select the Select All Hosts box to remove all of the hosts from the group.
g.
Click Finish to save the modification.
h.
Click Yes in the Warning dialog box.
i.
Click OK in the The Group Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Using the Host Access Configuration Option
To add devices to or remove devices from an existing group, or to select which ports the hosts will use to access devices, use the Host Access Configuration option. To do so:
1.
Select Setup
→Secure Manager to display the Secure Manager Configuration Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Click the radio button to select Host Access Configuration.
4.
Click Next to display the Select the Group to configure screen.
5.
Select the Expand Tree box to list all items in the Access Group Hosts and Devices section of the dialog box.
6.
Select the box corresponding to the Access Group to configure for host access.
7.
Click Next to display the Select the drives for host access dialog box which shows the current settings.
8.
Select or clear the box or boxes in the Select column to indicate which drive or drives to configure for host access.
9.
For each drive selected, also select the appropriate box in either the Port A or Port B columns to indicate which port to use. (The default is Port A.)
10. Click Next to display the Select the partitions for host access dialog box.
62 Modifying the Library Configuration
11. Select or clear the box or boxes in the Select column to indicate which partitions to configure for host access.
12. For each partition selected, also select the appropriate box in either the Port A or Port B columns to indicate which port to use. (The default is Port A.)
13. Click Finish to update host access.
14. Click OK in the The Host Access was updated successfully dialog box.
Using LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is the industry standard Internet protocol that provides centralized user account management. This library supports the Microsoft® Active Directory® LDAP server and user account information in the schema defined by RFC 2307. User password schemes must be encrypted using UNIX® crypt.
You can configure the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) settings any time after the initial library configuration. Once you enable and configure LDAP, you can view your current LDAP settings using the LDAP menu.
LDAP Server Guidelines
User account information is centralized and shared by different applications, simplifying user account management tasks. Administrative users can add, delete, and modify only local user account information.
User and Group Access
For LDAP accounts with user privileges, access to library partitions is determined by group assignment on the LDAP server. Groups must be created on the LDAP server with names that correspond to the library partition names. Users without administrator privileges must be assigned to these groups on the LDAP server to have access to the corresponding partitions on the library.
LDAP accounts with administrative privileges have access to all partitions and administrative functions and do not need to be assigned to partition-related groups on the LDAP server.
NOTE: Usernames and group objects must be in LDAP Distinguished Names formats.
OpenLDAP 2.4
You must install and run OpenLDAP 2.4 or later. The supported Objects in OpenLDAP 2.4 and above are of type Person or derived objects, and the group Objects must be of type
GroupOfNames
.
OpenLDAP must be compiled with Overlay Support and requires the installation of memberOf overlay. More information can be found in the man pages of OpenLDAP with the man slapo-memberof command.
Configuring LDAP
To configure LDAP:
1.
Select Setup
→User Configuration→LDAP.
The LDAP Configuration dialog box appears with the General tab displayed.
2.
On the General tab, you can enable or disable LDAP functionality:
•
To enable LDAP, select Enable LDAP.
•
To disable LDAP, clear the Enable LDAP check box.
3.
To configure or modify LDAP, use the appropriate tabs and set the following configurations:
Using LDAP 63
General tab
You can enable or disable LDAP functionality:
•
To enable LDAP, select Enable LDAP.
•
To disable LDAP, clear the Enable LDAP check box.
Server Configuration
Enter the IP address or the DNS name for the Primary and Alternate LDAP servers. Only primary is required.
To enter a servers DNS name, the library must already be configured for DNS. The DNS configuration is enabled by going to Setup
→Network Configuration→DNS Configuration. If the library is not configured for DNS then only hex characters are allowed in the Primary and Alternate fields (0-9, a-f).
The Secure check box enables the setup options to access a secure LDAP server, which can be done using any port except 389. The default secure port is 636. If you enable this option, you must retrieve the Trusted Root Certificate from the server by clicking the Retrieve TR button. Retrieval can take several minutes. A dialog box displays basic Trusted Root certificate information, such as subject name, MD5, and SHA 1 hashes. It is recommended that you verify this information independently on the LDAP server.
Port Enter the appropriate port in this field. The default port for non secure connections is 389, and it is 636 for secure (SSL) based LDAP connections. The port setting can be changed.
Search Information
The User and Password boxes should contain the user name and password of a LDAP server user with sufficient privileges to query the LDAP server. These are the login credentials that are sent to the LDAP server. The credentials are sent in the LDAP distinguished name format. The format required is specific to the LDAP server being accessed. The LDAP administrator can provide the information needed. As an example, the LDAP distinguished name for a local LDAP server is:
[email protected],OU=US,OU=Users,OU=Accounts,DC=global,DC=local,DC=net
Access tab
Context Information
The User Context is the search path used by the LDAP server to search for a user. The User Context is in the LDAP distinguished name format. The search will start at the context level specified and will continue until the name is found or all sub-contexts have been searched.
The Group Context is the search path used by the LDAP server to determine what groups a user is a member of.
Both User Context and Group Context can and are likely the same. The LDAP administrator can provide the information needed. For example:
OU=Accounts,DC=global,DC=local,DC=net
Library Access Groups
The Library Access Groups are used to determine the privilege level of the user once logged into the ESL G3. An ESL G3 operator can log in as a user, with limited access, or as an administrator with full access. The User level privilege is given to all members of the group entered in the User: field. The User group is entered in the LDAP distinguished name format. The Admin level privilege is given to all members of the group entered in the Admin: field. The Admin group is entered in the LDAP distinguished name format.
User level access is given to any user in the in the group specified in the User: field. The user is granted access to all partitions where the partition name matches the name of any group the user is a member of, even if the group name is not specifically listed in the LDAP setup. For example:
[email protected],OU=Managed
64 Modifying the Library Configuration
Groups,OU=Accounts,DC=global,DC=local,DC=net
Once all fields have been completed for the General and Access tab, then press the Test button to check the configuration and connection to the LDAP server. The LDAP server connection must be successfully verified before the configuration can be saved.
Test tab
The Test tab fields should only be completed after successful completion of the configuration test performed on the Access tab. Once the configuration has been verified, the Test tab allows an administrator the opportunity to enter a users name and password to ensure the LDAP server can validate the user and to view the privilege level granted.
1.
In the User: field, enter the LDAP credentialed password.
2.
In the Password: field, enter the LDAP credentialed password.
3.
Press Test. The user validation test is run.
Failure Modes
LDAP: Primary Server Down.
The error indicates a connection was not established between the ESL G3 and the LDAP server.
Either the LDAP server is not functional or some piece of data in the Server Configuration box on the General tab is not correct.
Search User or password incorrect.
The error indicates that either the User or the Password entered in the Search Information Box on the General tab is incorrect.
LDAP Configuration Error: User Context.
The error indicated that the User Context: data in the Context Information box on the Access tab is incorrect.
LDAP Configuration Error: Group Context.
The error indicated that the Group Context: data in the Context Information box on the Access tab is incorrect.
LDAP Configuration Error: Library User Group.
The error indicated that the User: data in Library Access Group box on the Access tab is incorrect.
LDAP Configuration Error: Library Admin Group.
The error indicated that the Admin: data in Library Access Group box on the Access tab is incorrect.
Test Tab Potential Failures
LDAP connection Test Failed. User.
The error indicated that the user name entered in the User: field of the Test User box on the Test tab is incorrect.
LDAP connection Test Failed. User — Password incorrect.
The error indicated that the password entered in the Password: field of the Test User box on the
Test tab is incorrect.
LDAP connection test successful. Administrator
The test user was successfully validated as an administrator.
Using LDAP 65
LDAP connection test successful. User
The test user was successfully validated as a user and the partitions that can be accessed by this user are listed.
Configuring library behavioral settings
The Library Behavioral Settings dialog box is used to enable and disable the following features of the library:
•
Automatic teach
•
Automatic inventory
•
Automatic drive unload
•
Logical SN addressing
•
IPv6
•
Extended I/E
To enable or disable these features:
1.
Click Setup
→Library Settings→Library Behavioral Settings.
2.
For each feature, select the Enable or Disable radio button.
3.
Click OK.
Configuring screen saver preferences
Use the Screen Saver preferences tab to customize the images that display on the LMC screen when the library is not in use. The screen saver starts automatically if the library is idle for a specified amount of time.
NOTE: Screen saver preferences can only be configured remotely, not using the touch panel.
To configure screen saver preferences:
1.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Library Settings→Screen Saver.
The Preferences dialog box appears with the Screen Saver tab displayed.
66 Modifying the Library Configuration
2.
Do one of the following:
•
Select Default to use the default HP screen saver with standard settings.
•
Select Custom to change screen saver settings such as activation, movement, or images.
•
Select Off to disable the screen saver. (The current settings are cleared.)
If you selected Custom, go to the next. Otherwise, go to
3.
Under Activation, enter a value in the Wait box to specify how much idle time must pass before the screen saver is activated. The activation wait time can be 1–120 minutes.
4.
Under Movement, specify the position and the motion of the screen saver image on the screen.
•
Select Random to display the screen saver image in a variety of positions.
•
Select Stationary to display a static screen saver image that does not move.
•
Select Linear to display the screen saver image as a floating image.
•
Enter values in the horizontal and vertical boxes to specify the movement of the screen saver image in pixels.
•
Enter a value in the Motion Delay box to specify the movement speed of the screen saver image.
5.
Under Images, specify the image files to display for normal functions, warning notices, and failure notices. You must select image files for all three functions.
•
To specify an image file, click Browse. Select the image file and then click Open. The image file must be in GIF, JPEG, or PNG format, and cannot be larger than 1 MB. In addition, image resolution is limited to 600 x 800 pixels.
•
Click Preview to preview an image file.
Configuring screen saver preferences 67
6.
Click OK to save the settings and close the Preferences dialog box.
Or, click Apply to save the settings without closing the Preferences dialog box.
7.
Because you made system configuration changes, you must click Yes to save the configuration changes For more information, see
“Saving and Restoring Library Configuration” (page 112) .
About the configuration record
The configuration record contains details about the library configuration and can be sent to a specified e-mail address or saved as a .txt file.
Information in the configuration record includes:
•
Product information: Product name and version, MCB and RCU versions, serial number, and modules/drives/partitions configuration
•
License information: License descriptions, quantities, and installation dates
•
Partition information: Serial numbers, online/offline statuses, and numbers of slots, drives, and I/E slots
•
Network information: Hostname, DHCP status, IP address, and IP, Netmask, and Gateway addresses
•
Drive information, for each drive: Location, partition, online/offline status, vendor, model, serial number, logical serial number, firmware version, drive type, and interface type:
•
Fibre Channel (FC) tape drives — World Wide Name (WWN) and loop ID, speed, and connection type
Before you can e-mail the configuration record, the library e-mail account must be configured. For information on configuring the library e-mail account, see
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47) .
Setting aisle lights
Aisle lights are optional on each module, and are mounted to the roof of each module to illuminate the inside of the library.
To set the duration for aisle lighting:
1.
From the main console, select Setup
→Library Settings→Aisle Light Settings.
The Aisle Light Settings dialog box appears.
2.
Select a duration for the light to illuminate: 30 minutes, 1 hour, or Always Off.
3.
Click OK.
NOTE: Regardless of the selected setting, the aisle lights will turn off automatically during all inventory and teach operations. At the completion of these events the lights are automatically turned back on if they were on prior to these operations.
For the time limited settings, if the lights were on before the operation, the timer starts over when the lights are automatically turned on.
For time limited aisle light settings, user interaction, such as using the touch panel or opening an
I/E station or aisle door, causes the timer to reset. The lights will automatically turn on if they are not already on.
The default setting is Always Off.
Clear the registered Command View TL management station
HP Command View for Tape Libraries (TL) software provides management and control of multiple tape libraries through a single pane of glass, while TapeAssure provides comprehensive summaries and detailed information about the status, performance, utilization, and health of all tape drives
68 Modifying the Library Configuration
and tape media. Utilization and performance reporting features allow you to optimize the use of your tape libraries and tape drives.
The first Command View TL management station to add a tape library to its launcher screen is automatically registered to receive TapeAssure events and statistics from that tape library. If you want a different management station to receive TapeAssure events from your library, you must first clear the management station currently registered with the library.
To clear the Command View TL management station currently registered with the library:
1.
Select Tools
→Clear Station to display the Clear Station dialog box.
2.
Click OK.
NOTE: TapeAssure data will no longer be collected for the library until a Command View TL management station registers with the library. See HP Command View for Tape Libraries User
Guide for information about Command View TL and TapeAssure.
Command View TL version 2.8 or later supports ESL G3 tape libraries. If Command TL and
TapeAssure are used with ESL G3, a software license is required per library.
Clear the registered Command View TL management station 69
3 Operating the Library
Logging On and Off
You can log on and off locally by using the library Operator Control Panel (OCP). Or you can log on and off remotely by using a web browser to access the LMC applet on a host computer.
Logging On From the OCP
To log on from the OCP:
1.
If the ESL G3 Logon dialog box is not already displayed on the library OCP (the screen saver appears) tap the OCP.
The ESL G3 Logon dialog box appears.
NOTE: On the OCP, the login dialog box includes the AMC keyboard. Use this keyboard to type the appropriate information into the fields.
2.
In the Name text box, type the name of the user or administrator account with which you want to log on. If you want to log on with the default administrator account, type admin.
NOTE: User names and passwords are case-sensitive. Select the Shift key in the AMC keyboard to display uppercase letters and special characters. This enables you to type one uppercase letter or special character before the ESL G3 Logon dialog box returns to displaying lowercase characters. To type more than one uppercase character or special character, select the Caps key. The Caps key toggles between displaying uppercase and lowercase characters.
Only one administrator at any given time can be logged on to the library.
If you want to log on using the default administrator account (admin), and you do not remember the password, contact technical support to reset the password.
3.
Position the cursor in the text box below the Name text box by tapping it, and then type the password for the user or administrator account.
NOTE: If you are logging on to the library for the first time using the default administrator account (admin), type admin for both the user name and passwrod. After you log on, the library prompts you to change the default admin password. You must enter and confirm a new password. Passwords that are most secure include a combination of letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more characters in length.
4.
After you type a user name and password, select OK.
Logging Off From the OCP
To log off from the OCP:
1.
Select Operations
→Log Off or select the Log Off button on the toolbar.
2.
A message appears that asks you whether you are sure that you want to log off. Select Yes.
The ESL G3 Logon dialog box appears.
Logging On From the Library Management Console (LMC) Using a Web Browser
The LMC Java applet lets you access all features of the LMC from a host computer using a standard web browser. To use the LMC applet, the host computer must have network access to the library, and you must know the IP address or hostname of the library.
70 Operating the Library
NOTE: If you do not know the IP address of the library, log on to the library using the Operator
Control Panel (OCP), click Setup
→Network Configuration, then write down the value that displays in the IP Address field.
Software Requirements
Before logging on from the LMC, make sure that the host computer meets the following software requirements:
•
Web Browser — Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher, Mozilla Firefox 3.0 or higher
•
Java Plug-in — Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6 update 24 or higher
For information on downloading the Java Plug-in contact: http://www.HP.com/support .
Accessing the LMC Applet
After verifying that the host computer meets the software requirements and has network access to the library, access the LMC and log on.
To access the LMC:
1.
On the host computer, use the web browser to access the IP address of the library.
The first time you access the LMC, the LMC applet is downloaded to the host computer.
Downloading the applet can take several minutes depending on the speed of the network.
Once the applet is downloaded, it is stored on the host computer and does not need to be downloaded again.
2.
If a security warning appears asking if you are sure you want to run the applet, click Run or
Yes.
The ESL G3 Logon dialog box appears.
3.
In the Name text box, type the name of the user or administrator account with which you want to log on. If you want to log on with the default administrator account, type admin.
NOTE:
•
User names and passwords are case-sensitive.
•
Only one administrator at any given time can be logged on to the library.
•
If you want to log on using the default administrator account (admin), and you do not remember the password, contact technical support to reset the password.
4.
In the Password text box, type admin for the administrator account.
Logging On and Off 71
NOTE: If you are logging on to the library for the first time using the default administrator account (admin), type admin for both the user name and password. After you log on, the library prompts you to change the default admin password. You must enter and confirm a new password. Passwords that are most secure include a combination of letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more characters in length.
5.
Click OK.
NOTE: After logging on, do not close the web browser window or use it to navigate to another URL. Doing so will close the LMC applet but might leave the current session active.
Logging Off From the LMC
To log off from the LMC:
1.
Select Operations
→Log Off or select the Log Off button on the toolbar.
2.
A message appears that asks you whether you are sure that you want to log off. Select Yes.
The ESL G3 Logon dialog box appears.
3.
To close the LMC applet, click Cancel.
Connecting to Multiple Libraries
This feature allows you log in to multiple libraries, and switch from one library console to another without logging off.
To connect to multiple libraries:
1.
From the LMC menu, click Connection
→New.
The Connect to Library dialog box appears.
2.
Type or select the library hostname or the library IP address, and click OK. You can use either
IPv4 or IPv6 addresses
Once you have connected to additional libraries, you can choose any of those libraries from the Connection drop-down list.
NOTE: To log off when connected to multiple libraries, first select the library from the
Connection drop-down list and follow the instructions at
“Logging Off From the LMC” (page
. Repeat this process to log off from additional libraries.
Using the Indicator Panel and Operator Control Panel (OCP)
The library provides an indicator panel and an OCP, as shown in
.
72 Operating the Library
Figure 9 Library Indicator Panel and OCP
1. Indicator panel
2. OCP
The indicator panel includes a Robotics Enabled button and indicator, a Status indicator, and a
Power button and indicator. The Library Management Console (LMC) appears on the OCP.
For more information about indicator panel functions, see
“Using the Indicator Panel” (page 73)
.
For a brief overview of the LMC, see
“Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC)” (page
.
Using the Indicator Panel
The Robotics Enabled indicator and the Power indicator each include a button. The Status indicator is not a button. These indicators do not report the status of communications with a host.
NOTE: The enabled state does not mean that robotics are communicating with the host. It means that the robotics are communicating with the library controller.
,
, and
describe the indicators in detail.
Using the Indicator Panel 73
Table 7 Robotics Enabled Indicator
Indicator
Green
No color
State and Explanation
Solid on-robotics are enabled and ready to process commands or are actively processing commands from the library controller. No attention required. Do not open the access door.
Blinking-a change of robotics state is pending, either from the enabled state to the not enabled state or from the not enabled state to the enabled state. No attention required. Do not open the access door.
Solid off-either robotics are not ready, the doors might be open, or the library might be powered off. Attention required. The operator should close the doors and press the Robotics Enabled button to return robotics to the enabled state.
Table 8 Status Indicator
Indicator
Green
Amber
State and Explanation
Solid on-normal. No attention required.
Blinking or solid on-fault. Attention required. Monitor the system status buttons. To determine whether the library has created any events, click Tools
→Event Viewer.
Table 9 Power Indicator
Indicator
Green
No color
State and Explanation
Solid on-normal. No attention required.
Solid off-power off. Attention required. To operate the library, you must turn on the power. Press the Power button.
Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC)
You can view the LMC from either the library OCP or a remote computer. If you use the OCP, you do not need to install the LMC because it is already installed on the library. To access the LMC using a web browser, see
“Logging On From the Library Management Console (LMC) Using a
.
To manage your library from a remote client, first perform the initial network configuration of the library from the OCP. For more information, see
“Setting up the Network Configuration” (page
.
The main LMC display consists of five areas:
•
The title bar of the LMC displays the words ESL G3 Library Management Console.
•
The menu bar provides access to all menu commands used to manage library functions.
Menu commands for user types admin and security are Operations, Monitor, Setup, Tools,
View, Connection, and Help.
The additional menu Service is available to user type service.
See
.
•
The tool bar displays icons that represent the most commonly run commands: I/E (view the import/export station slots), IMPORT (load tapes into the library from the import/export station),
EXPORT (move tapes from the library into the import/export station), EVENTS (view library events), EXPLORER (finding a tape in the library), and LOG OFF. See
•
The library information panel fills most of the main LMC display, presenting operational data from the current library, whether the current library is the physical library or a partition. The operation data is presented in four sections: Managed Views, Slots Utilized, Data Transfer,
74 Operating the Library
and Configuration. Of these, only Managed Views is an active section, meaning the user can interact with it. The others only display information. See
“Reading the Library Information
.
•
The Overall System Status buttons provide current status information for the six subsystems of the physical library: Drives, Connectivity, Control, Robotics, Power, and Cooling. See
.
See
“Viewing Details about Events” (page 81)
to interpret information provided from clicking the Robotics button in the Overall System Status section.
Figure 10 Viewing the LMC (physical library view shown)
Menus
The following seven LMC menus organize commands into logical groupings:
•
The Operations menu consists of commands that enable you to change the library mode of operation (online or offline), import and export cartridges, load and unload drives, move media, lock or unlock the I/E stations, perform an inventory, shut down the system, and log off.
•
The Monitor menu consists of commands that enable you to obtain status information about various aspects of the library, including system, drives, I/E stations, storage slots, media, sensors, the email configuration, users, partitions, and key management information if you are using ESKM.
•
The Setup menu consists of commands that enable you access the Setup Wizard and to set up and configure various aspects of the library from other menu choices, including partitions,
Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC) 75
secure manager, drive settings, the network configuration, physical library, users, notifications, date and time, licenses, e-mail, and SNMP trap registration. The security manager can enroll the library with ESKM from this menu.
•
The Tools menu consists of commands that enable you to maintain and troubleshoot the library by viewing events, controlling the drives, updating library or drive firmware, generating support events, teaching the library, running verification tests, saving and restoring library configurations, obtaining drive resource utilization reports, locating cartridges in the library via the Library Explorer, defragmenting partitions, using sift/sort, and clearing the station.
•
The View menu enables you to select the library (either the physical library or a partition) that you want currently displayed on the main LMC display. Some LMC menu commands require you to be in either a physical library or partition view to run them.
•
The Connection menu enables you to log on to multiple libraries and switch between consoles for different libraries without logging off.
•
The Help menu provides you with access to Online Help as well as information about the library, such as copyright information, the product version, firmware version, and build information for various library components (LMC server, LMC client, MCB, CMB, and RCU).
•
The Service menu is available only to those logged on with service permissions. This menu enables you to perform manual diagnostics and preventative maintenance, and enables you to debug the console.
If the OCP remains unused after a period of time, the library screen saver appears. The color of the screen saver image reflects the worst status of the library systems as indicated by the system status buttons. For example, if system status buttons show a mix of green (Good), yellow (Warning or Degraded), and red (Failed) states, the color of the screen saver image will be red.
summarizes all available commands, including required user privilege levels and required library environments (OCP or remote client). The LMC prompts you to take the library offline or to select either the physical library or a partition if the command you request requires you to change library mode.
Table 10 Menu Commands: Privileges and Environments
Menu
Command: Privilege Level Physical Library View Partition View
On the Operations menu:
Change
Mode
Admin, User
1
X
Import
X
Export
Drives
Move Media
I/E stations
Admin, User
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
X
X
2
X
2
X
2
X
Inventory
System
Shutdown
Log Off
Admin, User
Admin, User
Admin, User
1
X
X
X
X
X
OCP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2, 3
X
Remote Client
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
X
On the Monitor menu:
System Admin, User
1
X
76 Operating the Library
X X X
Secure
Manager
Admin
Drive Settings Admin
Network
Configurations
Admin
Admin Network
Security
Settings
Library
Settings
Admin
User
Configuration
Admin
Notifications
Date and
Time
Admin
Admin
Licenses
Encryption
Admin
Admin
On the Tools menu:
Event Viewer
Drives
4
Admin
Admin
Update
Firmware
Support
Events
Admin
Admin
Table 10 Menu Commands: Privileges and Environments (continued)
Menu
Command:
Drives
I/E Station
Privilege Level
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Physical Library View
X
X
Partition View
X
X
Admin, User
1
X X Slots
Media Admin, User
1
Sensors
Users
Admin, User
1
Configuration
Record
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Partitions
Key
Management
(ESKM)
Admin, User
1
X
Admin, User
1
X
X
X
On the Setup menu:
Setup Wizard Admin X
Partitions
4
Admin X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OCP
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Remote Client
X
X
Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC) 77
Table 10 Menu Commands: Privileges and Environments (continued)
Menu
Command:
Library
Diagnostics
Privilege Level
Admin
Save/Restore
4
Admin
Physical Library View Partition View
X
X
X
OCP
X
X
Remote Client
X
X
Reports
Library
Explorer
Admin
Admin, User
Partitions
Defragmentation
Admin
Sift Sort Admin
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X X
Clear Station Admin
On the View menu:
[physical library name]
: (Physical)
Admin, User,
Guest
5
[partition name]
(Partition)
Admin, User,
Guest
5
On the Connection menu:
New Admin, User,
Guest
[library IP address]
Admin, User,
Guest
On the Help menu:
Content Admin, User
About Admin, User,
Guest
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
On the Help menu:
Content Admin, User,
Guest
X X X X
About Admin, User,
Guest
X X X X
1
Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges.
2
Partition must be offline.
3
Feature is configurable from the OCP only, but the configuration is viewable from the OCP or remote client.
4
Physical library must be online.
5
Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations.
Toolbar
The toolbar consists of icons that represent commonly used commands that also are available on the menus.
The I/E button displays a table of the current contents of the Import/Export station. You also can display the table by clicking Monitor
→I/E Station. For more information, see
78 Operating the Library
The Import button launches the import of cartridges if the current library is a partition. You also can request an import operation by clicking Operations
→Import.
The Export button launches the export of cartridges if the current library is a partition. You also can request an export operation by clicking Operations
→Export.
The Events button displays events that the library created when it detected issues within the subsystems. You also can display events by clicking Tools
→Event Viewer. For more information, see
“Troubleshooting your Library” (page 179)
.
The Explorer button provides a graphical presentation of all the drives, cartridges, and slots in the library. The Library Explorer can display all library elements according to physical location in any configuration, from one module to eight modules, and one drive up to the maximum number of
96 drives. You also can view the explorer by clicking Tools
→Library Explorer. For more information, see
“Using Library Explorer” (page 99) .
The Log Off button logs off the current user after confirming the logoff request. You also can log off by clicking Operations
→Log Off. For more information, see
“Logging On and Off” (page 70) .
Reading the Library Information Panel
The library information panel, shown in
, occupies the central portion of the main LMC display. It provides you with a significant amount of dynamically updated status information.
Figure 11 LMC (partition view)
describes the areas on the library information panel.
Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC) 79
Table 11 Areas on the Library Information Panel
Area
System Information: Name
System Information: IP Address
Description
The name of the current library. This is the library that appears with a check mark beside it in the View menu. First, the genre of library appears (physical or partition), then, after a colon, the name of the library appears.
The IP address of the current library. This is particularly useful when you are connected to more than one library. See
.
System Information: Contact
Managed Views
The person to contact if you need access to or have questions about the library.
The current activity for the current library.
System Information: Activity
System Information: Physical Serial # or Partition
Serial #
The serial number of the physical library or partition, depending on which is currently selected.
System Information: Date The current date and user-enabled time. The date that appears reflects user settings, but the system operates according to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Lists the physical library and all partition as [physical library name]
(Physical), then [partition name] (Partition). Clicking the library or a partition selects it so that all menu choices and information displayed is specific to the library or partition selected. This is the only interactive section of the Library Information Panel.
Slots Utilized
Data Transfer
Configuration
This graph shows the percentage of occupied media slots in the library or partition, depending on the current view. The number of used media slots appears beneath the graph (occupied slots/total number of storage slots).
The bar graph contrasts the amount of data read and written for the past 24 hours. The units being reported appear beside the graph.
Configuration summary information is presented textually. Data points reported are:
•
Number of tape drives
•
Drive types: LTO-4, LTO-5, or MIXED
•
Total number of licensed storage slots (appears only in the physical library view)
•
Total number of storage slots in the physical library or partition, depending on the current view
•
Library type
System Status Buttons
System status buttons are located in the Overall System Status area at the bottom of the LMC. See
.
Figure 12 System Status Buttons in Good Status
Each button represents a subsystem.
lists the library subsystems and some of the components that each subsystem represents. Each field replaceable unit (FRU) in the library belongs to one of the subsystems.
80 Operating the Library
Table 12 Subsystems and their components
Subsystem
Drives
Robotics
Connectivity
Power
Control
Cooling
Components
Drives and media, such as brick firmware, drive bricks, drive sleds, cartridges, and magazines
Assemblies and processors involved in the movement and handling of library media, such as the IEX board, I/E stations, the pivot and reach assemblies, system barcode labels, doors, filters, the accessor, drive mounts, rails, and carriages
Host connectivity components, such as I/O management units, and the control management blade (CMB)
Power supplies and related hardware, such as the power distribution unit (PDU), power chassis, and fuses
Main processor cards and related hardware and software, such as system firmware, the management control blade (MCB), the robotics control unit (RCU), the library motor drive (LMD), and the operator panel
Cooling system components, such as fans for the library management module (LMM) and the I/O management unit
Each button displays a status indicator that reveals a Good, Warning, Degraded, or Failed state as follows:
Good (green) The library system is in working order, no problems or issues exist.
Warning or Degraded (yellow)
Failed (flashing red)
There is a degraded or failed component within this category that requires action, but the overall category still is functioning.
A component in this category has failed.
Click system status buttons to display additional information about the subsystems. The information that appears depends on the status shown on the button:
•
Good — either a message appears informing you that no events exist for the subsystem, or a list of subsystem events that are in Closed or Verified states appears.
•
Warning, Degraded, or Failed — a list of open events for the subsystem appears.
Events provide information about issues that the library has detected.
Viewing Details about Events
Events are error conditions in the library system. The system provides Overall System Status buttons to report details about errors that are discovered.
To see details about reported errors:
1.
Wait until the test is completed, or click Cancel to close the test dialog box.
2.
Click the Overall System Status button corresponding to the system for which to view events.
Alternatively, click the Events button in the toolbar.
Accessing the Library Management Console (LMC) 81
Understanding Location Coordinates
This section describes the coordinate addressing system that the library uses to indicate the location of cartridges and drives in the library.
You can use the Library Explorer feature to view a graphical presentation of all the drives, cartridges, and slots in the library. The Library Explorer can display all library elements according to physical location in any configuration, from 1 to 8 cabinets (called modules), and 1 drive up to the maximum number of 96 drives. See
“Using Library Explorer” (page 99)
.
NOTE: The ESG G3 can have up to 12 modules, but only the first 8 can contain drives. Drives must be installed in consecutive slots in the moduless.
Cartridge Locations
The library uses a coordinate addressing system that indicates the location of cartridges using six coordinates. The coordinates are represented by the library in a comma separated list. For example:
1,1,1,1,2,1 = aisle 1, module 1, rack 1, section 1, column 2, row 1
The following list explains each location variable:
•
Aisle — there is only one aisle in the library. This value will always be 1.
•
Module — there are from 1 to 12 modules (the control module, up to seven expansion modules that can contain drives, and up to 4 additional expansion modules that contain slots only).
The value will be between 1 and 12.
•
Rack — there are 2 rack designations inside each module. These will always be either 1 or
2, with 2 being the inside of the access door.
Figure 13 Aisle, Module, and Rack Numbering Locations
•
Section — there are 10 sections in a rack, numbered from top to bottom.
•
Column — there are 4 columns in a rack, numbered from left to right as you face the front of the rack. These are numbered from 1 to 4.
•
Row — this is equal to one cartridge slot. The number of rows per section can vary depending on the size of the cartridge. The rows are numbered from 1 to 6 for LTO cartridges.
shows the section, column and row numbering for rack 1 of a library that contains LTO cartridges. See
to review rack numbering.
82 Operating the Library
Figure 14 Section, Column, and Row Numbering for Rack 1 - LTO Cartridges
1. Column
3. X-axis rail counts as section 6
2. Row (individual slot)
4. Section
NOTE: Tape drives that are installed in rack 1 of a control module or an expansion module replace storage in columns 1 and 2. Because drives are installed from the bottom to the top, you lose the storage starting in section 10 first. You do not lose the magazine in columns 1 and 2 of section 5.
Column 1 never contains storage in the control module.
shows the section, column, and row numbering for rack 2 of a library that contains LTO cartridges. This is shown as you face the inside of the opened module door.
NOTE: The cartridges in the 24-slot LTO I/E station are addressed as part of column 3 and are in sections 1 through 4 (top to bottom). When you have an I/E station installed on rack 2, there are no cartridges in columns 3 and 4 of section 5. See
Understanding Location Coordinates 83
Figure 15 Section, Column, and Row Numbering for Rack 2 - LTO Cartridges
1. Column 2. I/E station
3. Cartridges in the I/E station are addressed by the library as part of column 3, sections 1 through 4
4. Magazines not present in a control module
5. Section
NOTE: In
Figure 15 (page 84) , the five magazines shown in column 4, sections 6-10 do not
exist in a control module. However, these magazines exist in expansion modules.
shows examples of location coordinates. These examples assume that the linear storage is located in aisle 1, module 1, and rack 1. That is why the first three numbers in the comma separated list are 1,1,1. The last three numbers represent the address on the linear storage assembly.
84 Operating the Library
Figure 16 Example Location Coordinates
1. Location coordinate 1, 1, 1, 3, 2, 1
2. Location coordinate 1, 1, 1, 7, 3, 2
3. Column 1 is not available in a control module, so there is no coordinate
The LMC uses dialog boxes, like the one shown in
, that enable you to specify cartridge locations. These coordinates are reported in parenthetical format with each element separated by commas. In parenthetical format, the location of cartridge KR5840L5, shown in the
Load Drives dialog box below, is (1,1,1,1,2,2).
Figure 17 Coordinates in Media Status dialog box
Understanding Location Coordinates 85
Tape Drive Locations
The location coordinates of a drive are based on the position of the drive in the module and section.
•
Tape drives are always in rack 1, column 1, of a particular module.
•
Columns are read from left to right as you face the rack.
•
Because all drives in the library are full-height drives, each drive is in row 1 of the designated section.
•
The library can accommodate 2 drive clusters per rack with each drive cluster containing up to 6 drives.
•
Drive number 1 is in the lowest section of the lower drive cluster. Drives are numbered from bottom to top.
shows the physical location of drive 9. Compare with
.
Figure 18 Drive-side Location Coordinates
1. Column 1
3. Module 1
5. Drive cluster
7. Section 7
9. Section 12
Table 13 Drive location coordinates
1
Aisle
1–8
Module
1
Rack
2. Rack 1 (back)
4. Section 1
6. Section 6
8. Drive 9 (1, 1, 1, 9, 1, 1)
1–12
Section (drive number)
1
Column
1
Row
86 Operating the Library
Viewing the Physical Library or a Partition
The View menu enables you to view details about the physical library or a specific partition in the library information panel area of the main LMC display.
NOTE: Before you can begin many of the library operations that this guide describes, you must first set the library view to either the physical library or a partition.
Using the View Menu
From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or a partition. The physical library is listed at the top of the View menu. Individual partitions, if they exist, are listed below the physical library.
After you select a library (or partition) view, the library information panel area of the main LMC display shows status information and statistical details about the physical library or partition selected.
Using the Managed Views Region of the LMC display
The Managed Views region of the LMC display enables you to quickly select between library views
(physical or individual partitions) and take the physical library or a partition online or offline. If you are using the LMC from a remote client, you can keep this dialog box in view while you use the LMC to perform other library operations.
1.
In the Managed Views region of the LMC, click the button with the name of the library or a partition to view.
The Name field in the System Information section of the LMC displays the name of the library or partition selected. The library information panel area of the main LMC display shows status information and statistical details about the physical library or partition selected.
2.
See
“Changing the Library State” (page 87)
to take the library offline or put it back online.
NOTE: You do not need to change the current library view to change the online or offline state of the physical library or a partition.
Changing the Library State
You can take the physical library or any of its partitions online or offline. Some library functions require that the physical library or partitions be in an online or offline state. You also can shut down the physical library from the LMC.
NOTE: Shutting down the library only prepares it to be powered off. You will use the shutdown procedure in some circumstances to prepare the library for remove and replace procedures.
Taking the Physical Library or a Partition Online or Offline
To take the physical library online or offline, change its mode:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library or the partition that you want to take online or offline. See
“Viewing the Physical Library or a Partition” (page 87) .
2.
Click Operations
→Change Mode. Alternatively, in the Managed Views section of the LMC, click the mode button next to the name of the physical library or partition for which you would like to change the mode. (The button reads either Online or Offline.)
The Change Library Mode dialog box appears with the current state of the physical library or partition shown.
Viewing the Physical Library or a Partition 87
•
Select the Online radio button to take the physical library or partition to an online state, which is the normal operating condition. In this mode, the robotics are enabled and all host commands are processed.
•
Select the Offline button to take the physical library or partition to an offline state. If only the physical library is taken offline, the library partitions will not process robotics commands, even though they are online. If only a partition is taken offline, neither the physical library nor the other partitions are affected.
3.
Select either Online or Offline, and then click OK.
4.
If you selected Offline, a message appears that asks you whether you want to continue. If you are sure that no backup applications are using the library, click Yes.
Online and Offline Functionality
Some library functions require the physical library or partitions to be in a particular state (either online or offline) before they can be performed. If you choose a function that requires the library or partition state to be changed from its current state, you are prompted to do so.
summarizes the library functions that require the physical library or partitions to be either online or offline.
Table 14 Library Functions Requiring Online or Offline State
Function
Operations
→Import
Operations
→Export
Operations
→Drives→Load
Operations
→Drives→Unload
Operations
→Move Media
Operations
→Inventory (partition view)
Setup
→Partitions (create, modify, or delete)
Physical Library
Online
Partition
Offline
Tools
→Partitions Defragmentation
Operations
→Inventory (physical library view)
Tools
→Save/Restore (restore, revert, or rescue)
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Teach
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Verification Tests (start test)
Tools
→Update Firmware→Library
Service
→Manual Diagnostics
—
Offline
Tools
→Update Firmware→Drives
Offline
—
Offline—Current view (library or partition) must be offline
88 Operating the Library
Working With Local User Accounts
You can set up three levels of local user accounts: guest, user, and administrator. Guests see only the main LMC display. Local Users can operate a partition, but cannot run diagnostic tools, which require access to the physical library. Administrators can access the entire physical library and all of its partitions.
Administrators are responsible for:
•
Setting up and managing users
•
Specifying logging and notification policies
•
Updating software
•
Setting the date and time
•
Importing, exporting, and moving media
•
Any other management associated with the physical library
For information on user accounts that reside on a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server, see
Creating Local User Accounts
To create local user accounts:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→User Configuration→Local Users.
The Local Users dialog box appears.
4.
To prevent guest login privileges on the library, click Disable Guest Login. You can toggle between Disable Guest Login and Enable Guest Login.
NOTE: For a list of commands that are available to users logging on to the library as a guest, see
Working With Local User Accounts 89
5.
To create a user account, click Create.
The Local Users - User Account Type dialog box appears.
6.
In the Enter User Name text box, type a user name.
NOTE: User accounts with the names guest, admin, and service are reserved. You cannot use these names for user accounts.
7.
In the Enter Password text box, type a password.
NOTE: Passwords that are most secure include a combination of letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more characters in length. The word password is not available for use.
8.
In the Confirm Password text box, type the password again.
9.
For Select Privilege, select a privilege level (Administrator or User).
NOTE: For a list of commands that are available to administrators and users, see
10.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
If you selected Administrator, the Finish button becomes available. To register your user account selections, click Finish, and then skip the remaining information in this procedure.
•
If you selected User, click Next.
The Local Users - User Account Type - Assign Partitions dialog box appears.
11.
On the Local Users - User Account Type - Assign Partitions dialog box, select the check boxes to the left of the libraries to which you want the user to have access, or select the Select All check box to give the user access to all listed libraries.
12.
To register your user account selections, click Finish.
NOTE: The Back button enables you to go back to a previous dialog box and make changes to your selections.
Modifying Local User Accounts
To modify local user accounts:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→User Configuration→Local Users.
The Local Users dialog box appears.
NOTE: If you want to modify guest privileges, you can toggle between Enable Guest Login and Disable Guest Login. For a list of commands that are available to users logging on to the library as a guest, see
4.
In the table of local users, click to highlight the name of the account that you want to modify, then click Modify.
The Modify User Account — [account name] screen of the Local Users dialog box appears.
5.
If you want to change the user account password, type a new password in both the Enter
Password and Confirm Password text boxes. Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
90 Operating the Library
NOTE: Passwords that are most secure include a combination of letters, numbers, and non-alphanumeric characters. Passwords must be eight or more characters in length. The word password is not available for use.
It is recommended that you change all account passwords periodically
6.
If you want to change the privilege level of this user account, select the appropriate privilege level (Administrator or User). Otherwise, proceed to the next step.
NOTE: For a list of commands that are available to administrators and users, see
7.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
If Select Privilege is set to Administrator, the Finish button is available. To register your user account changes, click Finish, and then skip the remaining information in this procedure.
•
If Select Privilege is set to User, click Next.
8.
Select the check boxes to the left of the partitions to which you want the user to have access, or select the Select All check box to give the user access to all listed partitions.
9.
To register your user account selections, click Finish.
NOTE: The Back button enables you to go back to a previous dialog box and make changes to your selections.
Deleting Local User Accounts
To delete local user accounts:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→User Configuration→Local Users.
The Local Users dialog box appears.
4.
In the table of names, click to highlight the name of the account that you want to delete.
5.
Click Delete.
A message appears that asks you whether you are sure that you want to delete the account.
6.
Click Yes.
The library deletes the user account.
Viewing Local User Account Permissions
To view local user account permissions:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Setup
→User Configuration→Local Users.
The Local Users dialog box appears.
4.
To view the permissions for all users, click Permissions.
The Users Permissions dialog box appears.
Working With Local User Accounts 91
5.
Click Close to return to the Local Users dialog box.
User Privileges and Library/Partition Functions
The library allows you to interactively control operations, set options, check operating statistics, and diagnose and repair errors. Some operations pertain only to a physical library, some only to a partition, and other functions work for both the physical library and partitions.
summarizes all available commands by privilege level and library and partition environment.
NOTE: Only one administrator user can be logged on and performing system configuration at any one time. If another administrator attempts to log on a message appears warning that only one administrator is permitted at a time. If a service user attempts to log on while an administrator or another service user is logged on the system automatically logs off the original administrator or service user.
Table 15 Remote Client Commands, Previlege Levels, and Views
Privilege level Physical library Commands using remote client
Operations menu
Operations Menu
Change Mode
Import
2
Export
2
Drives
→Load 2
Drives
→Unload 2
Move Media
I/E Stations
Inventory
System Shutdown
Log off
Monitor Menu
System
Drives
I/E Station
Extended I/E Slots
Slots
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin
Admin, User, Guest
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
X
3
X
Partition
X
X
X
X
X
X
2, 4
X
5
X
X
X
X
92 Operating the Library
Table 15 Remote Client Commands, Previlege Levels, and Views (continued)
Privilege level Physical library Commands using remote client
Operations menu
Media
Sensors
Email Configuration Record
Users
Partitions
Key Management
Setup Menu
Setup Wizard
Partitions
3
Configure
Control Path
Data Path Failover
Automated Media Pool
Secure Manager
Drive Settings
Network Configuration
Network Configuration
DNS Configuration
Network Security Settings
Library Settings
Aisle Light Settings
Screen Saver
Library Behavioral Settings
Drive Cleaning
User Configuration
Local Users
LDAP
Notifications
System Setup
Media Security
SMTP Email Configuration
SNMP Trap Registration
Date and Time
Licenses
Encryption
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin, User
1
Admin, User
1
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Partition
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Working With Local User Accounts 93
Table 15 Remote Client Commands, Previlege Levels, and Views (continued)
Privilege level Physical library Commands using remote client
Operations menu
Key Management Setup Wizard
Tools Menu
Event Viewer
Drives
3
Update Firmware
Library
Drives
Support Events
Library Diagnostics
3
Teach
Verification Tests
Save/Restore
3
Reports
Reporting Options
Events
Media
Library Configuration
Retrieve MIBs
Library Explorer
Partitions Defragmentation
Sift Sort
Export
Capture Report
Clear Station
View
[physical library name]
[partition name]
Help
Index
About
System status buttons
Drives
Connectivity
Control
Robotics
Admin
Admin, User, Guest
6
Admin, User, Guest
6
Admin, User
Admin, User, Guest
Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Admin
Partition
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
94 Operating the Library
Table 15 Remote Client Commands, Previlege Levels, and Views (continued)
Commands using remote client
Operations menu
Privilege level Physical library Partition
Power Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
X X
Cooling Admin, User
1
, Guest
1
X X
1
Users can use this command only from partitions to which they have privileges.
2
Physical library must be offline.
3
Physical library must be online.
4
Feature is configurable from the library OCP only, but the configuration is viewable from the OCP or remote client.
5
Shutdown is available to administrators only.
6
Guest can view the main LMC display, but cannot obtain more details or perform operations. Guests and users can view status information from the faces of status buttons, but they cannot click them to obtain details.
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library
Always perform the shutdown process before you remove power from the library. Shutdown prepares the library operation system and firmware for when you physically turn off power to the library. Shutdown makes sure that the library finishes all active commands received from the host and prevents the processing of any new commands. It also shuts down all partitions. Shutdown can only be performed from the OCP.
Reboot shuts down and restarts the library operating system and firmware. When performing a reboot, the library finishes all active commands received from the host application and does not process any new commands. The library shuts down all partitions and restarts them during the reboot. In addition, if automatic inventory is enabled, the library performs an inventory of cartridges, tape drives, and slots during a reboot. Reboot can be performed from the OCP or a remote client
LMC.
CAUTION: Before shutting down or rebooting the library, make certain there is no I/O activity on any of the partitions.
To shut down or reboot the library:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
Select Operations
→System Shutdown.
The System Shutdown dialog box appears.
Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library 95
3.
Select Shutdown to do a complete shutdown and power off of the library (from the OCP only), or select Reboot to do a reset of the library without powering off (from the OCP or a remote client LMC).
A message appears that asks you whether you want to continue.
4.
If you are sure that all library operations are finished, click OK.
NOTE: To recover from library shutdown, you must cycle power on the library (power it off and then power it on). See
“Powering Off the Library” (page 96)
and
When the shutdown process completes, the OCP turns dark. The library is now ready to be powered off.
Powering Off the Library
CAUTION: Always perform the shutdown procedure before powering off the library. Shutdown prepares the library operation system and firmware for when you physically turn off power to the library. If you do not perform library shutdown before you power off the library, loss of data could occur. See
“Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library” (page 95) .
To power off the library:
1.
After starting the shutdown process, wait for the LMC display to turn dark.
2.
To turn off power to the library, press the Power button on the indicator panel.
3.
On the power distribution units, set the circuit breaker switch to the down (O) position.
Powering On the Library
To power on the library:
1.
Make sure that you wait 5 minutes after powering off the library before you power it on.
CAUTION: Waiting 5 minutes is important because the power supply discharges for several seconds after you power off the library. If you attempt to power on the library too soon, the power supply will fault.
2.
On the power distribution unit(s), set the circuit breaker switch to the up (I) position.
3.
To turn on power to the library, press the Power button on the indicator panel.
The library begins to boot up. Within five minutes, the LMC display appears on the library
OCP. A library with only a few drives usually will be fully powered on and ready for use within 10 minutes. However, if a library is large with a high number of drives, it can take more than an hour for the library to fully power on, complete its discovery process, and become ready for use. During the power-on process, the Robotics Enabled indicator flashes. When the library is fully up and ready to receive commands, the Robotics Enabled indicator turns solid green.
Locking/Unlocking the I/E Station
The ESL G3 I/E stations have multiple open and close sensors. When you are finished accessing the I/E station, make sure the station door is fully closed.
There are three reasons the I/E station door locks:
•
The library imports or exports a cartridge from the I/E station door. While the library is attempting to import or export a tape from a given I/E station slot, only the associated I/E station door is locked in the closed position. All other I/E station doors remain accessible. On a Get command from an I/E station slot, the associated I/E station door remains locked until
96 Operating the Library
the media has been successfully moved to its destination. This allows the media to be returned to the I/E station slot in the event of a Put error.
•
A user has requested that the I/E station door be locked.
•
The application software has locked the I/E station as part of the normal tape movement process.
Administrative users can lock or unlock the I/E station doors using an option from the Operations menu.
To lock or unlock the I/E station:
1.
From the View menu or in the Managed Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
Click Operations
→I/E Station.
NOTE: The I/E Station # column lists the I/E station number for each door. All single door
I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at the control module. All double door I/E stations are numbered with a number and a letter, such as 2A and 2B, the module number (1-8), with
A as the left I/E station and B the right I/E station.
3.
To change the state of the I/E station doors, do one of the following:
•
To lock an I/E station door, in the appropriate Action column, click Lock.
•
To unlock an I/E station door, in the appropriate Action column, click Unlock.
4.
To return to the main console, click Close.
Using the Library When Robotics Are Not Ready
When the library robotics are not yet ready to accept commands, features of the LMC are still available while others are not. This can happen during startup, reboot, or while the library is running. During run time, for example, the robotics will become unavailable if someone opens and closes an access door without pressing the Robotics Enabled button.
Whenever robotics become disabled, a message appears in the Activity area on the main LMC display that states, Warning: The Robotics are not Enabled. Users can log on locally or remotely while the robotics are disabled.
lists the menu commands that are available when the robotics become disabled either before system discovery can occur or after system discovery has occurred. As the table shows, significantly fewer menu commands are available when the library is started up or rebooted and the robotics become disabled before system discovery occurs.
NOTE: Menu commands not listed in the table are not available when the robotics become disabled, regardless of when the robotics become disabled. Unavailable menu commands are grayed out on the LMC.
Table 16 Menu Commands when Robotics are Disabled
Available Menu Commands When Robotics Become Disabled
Operations
→Change Mode (for shutdown only)
Operations
→Log Off
Monitor
→Drives >
Monitor
→I/E Station
Monitor
→Slots
Monitor
→Media
Monitor
→Sensor
X
X
X
X
X
After Discovery
X
X
Before Discovery
X
X
Using the Library When Robotics Are Not Ready 97
Table 16 Menu Commands when Robotics are Disabled (continued)
Available Menu Commands When Robotics Become Disabled
Monitor
→Users
Setup
→Setup Wizard
Setup
→Partitions
Setup
→Network Configuration (from OCP only)
Setup
→Library Settings
Setup
→Users
Setup
→Notification
Setup
→Date and Time
Setup
→Licenses
Setup
→Secure Manager
Tools
→Event Viewer
Tools
→Drives
Tools
→Connectivity
Tools
→Save/Restore
View
→[physical library name] (Physical)
View
→[partition name] (Partition)
Help
→Content
Help
→About
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
After Discovery
X
Before Discovery
X
X
X
X
X
X
98 Operating the Library
4 Monitoring the library
The library includes advanced system monitoring and alerting mechanisms that inform you of library status and issues. It provides you with status information about various library subsystems and components. It also notifies you of issues it detects and guides you through diagnosing and correcting issues before problems interfere with backups.
Using Library Explorer
You can use the Library Explorer feature to view a graphical presentation of all the drives, cartridges, and slots in the library. The Library Explorer displays all library elements according to physical location in any configuration, from 1 module to 12 modules, and 1 drive up to the maximum number of 96 drives.
You can access the Library Explorer from both the physical and partition views, but the functionality in the physical view is limited. If you are in a partition view, Library Explorer displays slots and drives pertaining to that particular partition.
The Library Explorer features are available to administrator and service users, along with non-administrative users who have limited access to library functions. Users who do not have administrative privileges can perform all Operations options available to non-administrative users directly from the Library Explorer dialog boxes.
You can use the Library Explorer to directly perform the following tasks:
•
Locate an element by entering its address
•
Locate a cartridge by entering the media barcode
•
Load and unload drives
•
Move cartridges
•
Perform inventory
•
Import and export
•
View drive details
•
Perform all drive related functions
To use Library Explorer:
1.
Click Tools
→Library Explorer, or click the EXPLORER button in the toolbar.
The Library Explorer dialog box appears.
Using Library Explorer 99
2.
Display library data using either the Select Filter options or clicking on a particular module in the Select Module section of the dialog box.
•
Using Select Filter, search for and display specific criteria according to device type and location coordinates, or by Media ID.
◦ Select the DeviceType filter, then from the Type drop-down list click the appropriate device type: Storage, I/E (I/E Station), or Drive. Click Show.
The Control Module dialog box displays a graphical view of the library elements according to the Type selected.
◦
To search for a specific cartridge according to the barcode, select the Media ID filter, type the barcode in the Media ID field, then click Show.
The Module dialog box displays the specific cartridge highlighted in red within the module where it is located.
◦ To search for a specific cartridge according to the element address, select the Element
Address filter, type the element address in the field, then click Show. You must be in partition view to filter using the Element Address.
•
In the Select Module area, select a specific module in the library to view. On a multi-module library, all modules are represented.
100 Monitoring the library
◦ In the Select Module area, click on the module you want to view. The Module dialog box displays the current configuration of Rack one and Rack two (Door - Inside view) according to the selected module.
NOTE: The Rack two (Door - Inside view) view is a MIRROR image of the outside view, so I/E station B is on the left, and I/E station A is on the right.
If you search for an element by its address or locate a cartridge by its media barcode, the search result appears in red in the Control Module dialog box.
3.
To return to the Library Explorer dialog box, click Close.
The Library Explorer dialog box appears.
Using Library Explorer 101
Understanding the Graphical Display, frame view
You can access the Library Explorer Control Module from both the physical and partition views, but the functionality in the physical view is limited. If you are in a partition view, you can view slots and drives pertaining to that particular partition.
•
The Library Explorer Module dialog box displays the current configuration of Rack One and
Rack Two (Door - Inside view) according to the module you chose.
•
The Rack Two (Door - Inside view) view is a MIRROR image of the outside view, so I/E station
B is on the left, and I/E station A is on the right.
•
Slots containing cartridges are blue. Empty slots are black. Your search result appears in red.
•
Details concerning the particular cartridge, drive, or slot appear in the Information area.
The Information area displays the following details:
•
Type
•
Location
•
Element
•
Partition
•
Barcode (media ID)
•
Barcode numbers appear on slots containing cartridges. If you do not want to view the barcode information, clear the Show check box.
•
If you click on a specific slot or drive, that slot or drive is highlighted in red, and details about the slot or drive appear in the Information area.
•
To move from one module to another, click on the arrows at the bottom of the dialog box.
Accessing Library Operations
To access available library operations for a specific drive or slot, from the Library Explorer Module, click on Menu or right click on the drive or slot. You can perform the following operations, depending on what library or partition is selected:
•
View details of a drive
•
Conduct an Inventory of a drive or a slot
•
Load media into a drive
•
Move media
•
Import cartridges
•
Export cartridges
Monitoring System Components
The LMC provides detailed information about the status of the library and components. You also can access statistics about the library and other helpful information, such as library and component serial numbers, port numbers, World Wide Names (WWNs), IDs, and firmware versions.
Monitoring System Status
The System Status dialog box displays status information for various library entities (hardware or system metrics). You can view system status for a physical library or a partition.
To monitor system status:
1.
Click Monitor
→System.
The System Status dialog box appears.
102 Monitoring the library
describes the elements on the System Status dialog box.
Table 17 System Status Dialog Box
Element
Item
Serial Number
Status
Version
Description
A system item for which status information is available (hardware or system metric).
If applicable or available, the serial number or other identifying number of the system item.
Status information for the system item.
If applicable, the firmware version currently loaded on the system item.
describes the items that can appear in the status list.
Table 18 Status List Items
Item
Library
Serial Number Status Description
The library serial number The status of the library (Online or Offline).
Library Uptime The library serial number The amount of time that the library has been up (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
Media Moves The library serial number The number of media moves during the library history.
Recovered Gets The library serial number The number of recovered gets during the library history.
Version
Firmware version
N/A
N/A
N/A
Recovered Puts The library serial number The number of recovered puts during the library history.
N/A
Recovered
Scans
MCB
CMB
RCU
Vertical Motion
The library serial number The number of recovered scans during the library history.
The MCB serial number
The CMB serial number
The RCU serial number
The RCU serial number
N/A
The current status of the MCB
(Good, Degraded, or Failed).
Firmware version
For each CMB that is present, the current status of the CMB (Good,
Degraded, or Failed).
Firmware version
Firmware version The current status of the RCU
(Good, Degraded, or Failed).
The number of meters vertically traveled during the library history.
N/A
Horizontal
Motion
The RCU serial number The number of meters horizontally traveled during the library history.
N/A
2.
To mail, save, or print status information, use the Send button (see
Printing Status Information” (page 121) ).
3.
Click Close to close the dialog box.
Monitoring Drive Status
The Drive Status dialog box displays status information for tape drives in the currently-selected partition. If you are working in the physical library, status information for all drives appears. You can perform this procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
To monitor drive status:
Monitoring System Components 103
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library or the appropriate partition. From the
View menu or in the Managed Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library or partition.
2.
Click Monitor
→Drives.
The Drive Status dialog box appears.
describes the elements on the Drive Status dialog box.
Table 19 Drive Status Dialog Box
Element
Type
WWN
WWN Port 1
WWN Port 2
Link Status P1
Link Status P2
Health
Firmware level
Barcode
Location
Physical SN
Vendor
Control Path
Data Path Failover
Encryption
Partition Name
Usage Type
Description
The type of drive (for example, LTO-5 – FC).
For a Fibre drive only, the World Wide Name of the drive.
For a Fibre drive only, the World Wide Name of drive port 1.
For a Fibre drive only, the World Wide Name of drive port 2.
The status of port 1 on the drive (for example, Good or
Failed).
The status of port 2 on the drive (for example, Good or
Failed).
Drive health (for example, Good or Failed).
The firmware level of the drive.
The barcode of the cartridge in the drive.
The location of the drive by means of a coordinate system. For information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
The serial number of the particular drive.
The name of the drive vendor.
Reports if a drive is a Control Path (Primary). The values are Primary or None. It also reports which drive is currently the active drive, for example, Primary (Active).
Reports whether data path failover for the drive is enabled or disabled.
The Encryption type currently used by the drive. The values are Application Managed, Library Managed, or
Unsupported if the drive does not support encryption.
The name of the partition to which the drive is assigned.
Indicates the drive is for use in regular partitions
(Standard).
3.
From the Drive Status dialog box, you can perform the following tasks:
•
Change the sorting of drives in the status list (for example, by type or location) by clicking the column heading by which you want the drives sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
•
Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button (see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information” (page 121) ).
4.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
104 Monitoring the library
Monitoring I/E Station Status
The I/E Station Status dialog box displays detailed information about the magazine slots in the
I/E stations within the currently selected partition. If you are working in the physical library, status information appears for all magazine slots in all I/E stations. You can perform this procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
NOTE: Only modules 1–8 can have I/E stations. Modules 9–12, if present, do not support I/E stations.
To monitor I/E station status:
1.
Click Monitor
→I/E Station or use the I/E toolbar button.
The I/E Station Status dialog box appears.
describes the elements on the I/E Station Status dialog box.
Table 20 I/E Station Status Dialog Box
Element
I/E Station #
Magazine #
Barcode
Slot Type
Partition Name
Description
All single door I/E stations are numbered starting with
1 at the control module.
All double door I/E stations are numbered with a number and a letter, for example: 2A and 2B — the frame number (1-8), with A as the left I/E station and B as the right.
The number of the I/E station magazine (numbered from top to bottom in the I/E station).
The cartridge barcode or the word Empty.
The media type (LTO).
The name of the partition to which the I/E station is assigned.
2.
From the I/E Station Status dialog box, you can perform the following tasks:
•
Change the sorting of magazine slots in the status list (for example, by I/E station number or partition name) by clicking the column heading by which you want the magazine slots sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
•
Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button (see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information” (page 121) ).
3.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Monitoring Slots Status
The Slots Status dialog box displays detailed information about the slots in the currently-selected partition. If you are working in the physical library, you can view status information for all slots.
Because the number of slots in a physical library or partition can be quite large, you can select a subset of the available slots. You can perform this procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
To monitor slot and extended I/E slot status:
1.
From the View menu or in the Managed Views section of the LMC, click the name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
2.
Click Monitor
→Slots.
The Slots Status dialog box appears.
Monitoring System Components 105
describes the elements on the Slots Status dialog box.
Table 21 Slots Status Dialog Box
Description Element
Filter Location:
Aisle
Module
Rack
Section
Column
Row
Status
Barcode
Location
# Puts
Partition Name
The location of slots by aisle number
The location of slots by module number
The location of slots by rack number
The location of slots by section number
The location of slots by column number
The location of slots by row number
The barcode of the cartridge in the slot, or EMPTY
The location of the slot (see
The number of Put operations during the library history
The name of the partition to which the slot is assigned
(column exists in library view only)
106 Monitoring the library
3.
If appropriate, perform the following tasks from the Slots Status dialog box:
•
Change the sorting of slots in the status list (for example, by location or slot type) by clicking the column heading by which you want the slots sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
•
Use filtering criteria to select the slots that you want to appear in the status list on the dialog box (see
“Filtering Slots by Location” (page 107) ).
•
Check the status of the slots (see
“Checking slot status” (page 107)
).
•
Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button (see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information” (page 121) ).
4.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Checking slot status
Use the Slots Status dialog box to view detailed information about the slots in the currently-selected library or partition.
To view slot status information:
1.
Perform steps 1–3 of
“Monitoring Slots Status” (page 105)
.
2.
To see only occupied or empty slots, select OCCUPIED or EMPTY from the State drop down box, then select Show.
3.
Select Send to save, e-mail, or print the information.
4.
Select Close to exit the dialog box.
Filtering Slots by Location
You can specify the slots that you want to appear in the status list by selecting the location from the Filter area of the Slots Status dialog box.
To filter slots by location:
1.
Perform steps 1–3 of
“Monitoring Slots Status” (page 105)
.
2.
Click the appropriate option from each of the Location drop-down lists:
•
Aisle
•
Module
•
Rack
•
Section
•
Column
•
Row
The defaults are set to All unless a drop-down list does not have more than one option. For example, the Aisle drop-down list is always set to 1 by default because only one aisle exists in the library. Therefore, the drop-down list also is grayed out and selections cannot be made from it.
These selections correspond to location coordinates for the physical library. For example, to select all slots in the drive-side rack of the control module, click 1 for module, 1 for rack, All for section, All for column, and All for row. For more information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
3.
Click Show.
4.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Monitoring Media Status
The Media Status dialog box displays detailed information about the media in the currently selected partition. If you are working in the physical library, you can view status information for all media.
Monitoring System Components 107
Because the number of media in a physical library or partition can be quite large, you can select a subset of the available slots. You can perform this procedure while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
To monitor media status:
1.
Click Monitor
→Media.
The Media Status dialog box appears.
describes the elements on the Media Status dialog box.
Table 22 Media Status Dialog Box
Description Element
In the Filter area:
Barcode The cartridge barcode to list (allows the asterisk [*] wildcard character).
The type of cartridge to list (for example, LTO-4).
Media Type
In the status list area:
Barcode
Media Type
Location
# Mounts
Encryption
Partition Name
The cartridge barcode.
The type of cartridge (for example, LTO-5).
The location of the slot (see
The number of mounts within the history of the library.
Reports whether the media is encrypted. The values are
Encrypted, Not Encrypted or Unknown.
The name of the partition to which the slot is assigned.
2.
From the Media Status dialog box, you can perform the following tasks:
•
Change the sorting of media in the status list (for example, by location or media type) by clicking the column heading by which you want the media sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
•
Use filtering criteria to select the media that you want to appear in the status list on the dialog box (see below).
•
Mail, save, or print status information by using the Send button (see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information” (page 121) ).
To specify the media that you want to appear in the status list, select media ID and media type criteria from the Filter area of the Media Status dialog box:
1.
Use one or both of the following elements to specify the media that you want to appear in the status list:
•
To specify a media item by media ID, type the exact barcode that is associated with a particular cartridge in the Barcode text box. You also can use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard character to represent one or more characters in the media ID. This will list all media for
IDs that match the designated pattern. For example, if you set the Barcode value to J00*, any media with IDs that start with J00 will appear in the status list.
•
To specify media by media type, click All or a specific media type, such as LTO5, from the Media Type drop-down list. Only media types that are currently used in the library appear in the drop-down list. The default is set to All.
2.
Click Show.
108 Monitoring the library
Monitoring library configuration
View the I/E, drive, and slot partition distribution in the Library Configuration report:
1.
Click Tools
→Reports→Library Configuration.
2.
To print the file, click the Print icon, select the desired settings in the Print dialog box, then click OK.
3.
To save the file, click the PDF icon, type the desired settings into the Saving Report into a PDF
- File dialog box, then click Confirm.
4.
To exit the report, click the Close icon.
Working with the media usage report
The Media Usage Report collects information on all media that have ever been in the library, including media that is no longer in the library. Lifetime media usage metrics are associated with the cartridge and are kept on the embedded chip. The report reflects what the drive reports from the media chip whenever the media is unloaded, and lists any associated errors.
When the log reaches maximum size, old information is deleted as new information is added.
To view the media usage report:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Select Tools
→Reports→Media→Usage.
The Media Usage Report dialog box is displayed, showing the information in
.
Table 23 Media Usage Report Dialog Box
Field
Barcode
Serial number
Manufacturer
Type
Manufacture date
Thread count
MB read
MB written
Recovered write errors
Recovered read errors
Unrecovered write errors
Unrecovered read errors
Encryption
Description
Media cartridge barcode label
Media cartridge serial number
Media cartridge manufacturer
Media type (L4 or L5)
Media cartridge manufacturing date and time (format:
YYYYMMDD HH:MM:SS)
Number of times the tape has been mounted and threaded on the drive
Cartridge lifetime MB read
Cartridge lifetime MB written
Errors in writing data where an attempt to re-write the data was successful
Errors in reading data where an attempt to re-read the data was successful
Errors where all re-write attempts failed and the data could not be successfully written to the tape
Errors where all re-read attempts failed and the data could not be successfully read from the tape
Cartridge Encryption Status (Unknown, Encrypted, or
Not Encrypted)
3.
To e-mail, save, or print the report, click Send.
•
To indicate that you want to send the information as an e-mail message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail address in the Email text box or select an
Monitoring System Components 109
existing address from the drop-down list. If appropriate, type a comment in the Comment text box to send with the information.
•
To save the information, select Save, then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which you want the information saved, or click Browse to specify a location and a file name.
NOTE: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
•
To indicate that you want to send the information to a printer, select Print.
NOTE: The Print option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
4.
Click Cancel to exit the Media Usage Report.
Monitoring Sensor Status
The Sensor Status dialog box displays detailed information about the library power and cooling systems, such as operational status, temperature, voltage or wattage, and fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). You can perform the following procedures while viewing either the physical library or a partition.
Accessing the Sensor Status Dialog Box
To access sensor status:
1.
Click Monitor
→Sensors.
The Sensors Status dialog box appears with the Cooling Fan tab displayed.
Displaying Cooling Fan Information
To display detailed information about the library cooling fans:
1.
Click the Cooling Fan tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
describes the elements on the Cooling Fan tab.
Table 24 Cooling Fan Information
Element
Name
Status
RPM
Location
Description
The name of the cooling fan sensor.
The status of the cooling fan. If the fan speed is within normal operating limits, the status is Nominal.
Otherwise, a warning or alarm is indicated.
The current speed of the fan in rotations per minute
(RPM).
The location of the cooling fan within the library.
Locations of cooling fans for control management blades
(CMBs) are indicated by means of a coordinate system.
For information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
2.
To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Power Supply information
To display detailed information about the library power supplies:
1.
Click the Power Supply tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
describes the elements on the Power Supply tab.
110 Monitoring the library
Table 25 Power Supply Information
Element
Name
Wattage
Type
Location
Description
The name of the power supply sensor.
The amount of power in watts.
The type of power (AC or DC).
The location of the power supply within the library.
2.
To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Temperature Information
To display temperature status information for various library components:
1.
Click the Temperature tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
describes the elements on the Temperature tab.
Table 26 Temperature Information on Sensor Status Dialog Box
Element
Name
Status
Celsius
Location
Description
The name of the temperature sensor.
The temperature status in the vicinity of the sensor. If the temperature is within normal operational limits, the status is Nominal. Otherwise, a warning or alarm is indicated.
The sensor temperature reading in degrees Celsius.
The location of the temperature sensor within the library.
Control management blade (CMB) locations are indicated by means of a coordinate system. For information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
2.
To view current information, click Refresh.
Displaying Voltage Information
To display voltage status information for various library components:
1.
Click the Voltage tab on the Sensor Status dialog box.
describes the elements on the Voltage tab.
Table 27 Voltage Information on the Sensor Status Dialog Box
Element
Name
Status
Millivolts
Type
Location
Description
The name of the voltage sensor.
The voltage status at the location of the sensor. If the voltage is within normal operational limits, the status is
Nominal. Otherwise, a warning or alarm is indicated.
The sensor voltage reading in millivolts.
The type of power at the location of the sensor (AC or
DC).
The location of the voltage sensor within the library.
Control management blade (CMB) locations are indicated by means of a coordinate system. For information about location coordinates,
Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
Monitoring System Components 111
2.
To view current information, click Refresh.
Saving and Restoring Library Configuration
The library save and restore capabilities enable you to save a remote or local copy of configuration settings for the library drives and partitions, including the allocation of drives, storage magazines, and I/E station magazines to each partition. If the current library configuration becomes lost or unstable, you can use the LMC to apply the locally or remotely saved configuration image, which eliminates the need to reconfigure the entire library to bring it back to its original state.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box enables you to:
•
Save configuration settings of a library as a remotely or locally stored image.
•
Restore, revert, or rescue the library by applying a remotely or locally stored image of a library configuration settings.
CAUTION: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the library shuts down. You must have physical access to the library to bring the library back up. If you are performing a restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote access, the library will remain shut down until the library is directly powered back on.
Types of Configuration Image Files
There are three types of configuration images that correspond to the Restore, Rescue, and Revert commands:
•
The restore image is stored on a remote file system and is created any time you use the Save command. You might restore the library configuration, for example, if the locally saved library configuration is lost because the compact flash memory on the Management Control Blade
(MCB) is replaced. Because of the image remote location, the Save and Restore commands are available only through the remote client.
•
The rescue image is stored locally on the library file system and is created any time you use the Save Rescue command. You might rescue the library configuration, for example, if the library becomes unstable due to a configuration change and you want to roll back the library configuration settings to a previous state. The Save Rescue and Rescue commands are available from both the remote client and the library OCP. You also have the option to save the rescue image when you save the remote restore image.
•
The revert image is automatically created and stored locally as the first step of any restore or rescue operation. The Revert command is available from both the remote client and the local
OCP.
When to Save the Library Configuration
Even though you can choose to save the library configuration at any time, the library prompts you to save in certain situations. Specifically, the library prompts you to save whenever you change configuration settings in the following areas:
•
User accounts
•
Event notifications
•
E-mail setup
Other configuration changes that the library detects cause the library to generate warning events for the Control subsystem. This causes a warning icon to appear on the Control system status button.
Be aware that if a more serious unresolved event already exists in that status group, the warning
112 Monitoring the library
event is generated, but no notification is sent until the more serious problem event is resolved or closed.
CAUTION: Changes to hardware, such as removing drives, do not prompt you to save, either by means of messages or warning events. Therefore, it is important to save the configuration image after a hardware configuration change.
Saving a Remote Restore Image
Use the Save command to save a library configuration restore image on a remote file system. To make sure that the image captures all library configuration changes, save the image often.
To save a remote restore image:
1.
Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Save command is not available from the library OCP.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Save/Restore.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
4.
Click Save.
5.
Using the file chooser dialog box, specify a path to a directory on your remote file system in which to save the restore image. You only need to specify the path because the MCB determines the image file name.
6.
To proceed, click Open.
The library prompts you to decide whether you want to write over the current rescue image that is stored locally on the library.
7.
Click Yes.
The rescue image timestamp that appears on the Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box will be updated to indicate that the file has changed
If no rescue image exists, the library prompts you to decide if you want to generate one.
If the save operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates the name of the image file that was saved to the remote file system. If the save operation does not succeed, a message appears that describes the error that occurred.
Saving a Local Rescue Image
Use the Save Rescue command to save a library configuration rescue image locally on the library file system. To make sure that the image captures all library configuration changes, you should save the image often.
To save a local rescue image:
Monitoring System Components 113
1.
Log on as an administrator from the remote client or from the library OCP.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Save/Restore.
4.
Click Save Rescue.
The save rescue operation starts.
If the save rescue image operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the rescue image file was saved to the library file system. The rescue image timestamp displayed on the
Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box will be updated to indicate that the file has changed.
If the save rescue operation does not succeed, a message appears that describes the error that occurred.
Restoring Library Configuration
Use the Restore command to restore a library using a configuration image that is saved on a remote file system.
If library configuration has occurred since the last time the image was saved, those changes will be lost when the older configuration is restored. The restore operation will succeed, but you will then need to reconfigure the library, including the partitions and mappings. Therefore, it is important to save the local rescue and/or remote restore image periodically, especially following hardware configuration changes.
CAUTION: Be cautious if you plan to use a saved library configuration image that is out of date.
You might restore configuration information that you do not want, such as former passwords, partitions, mappings, and hardware configurations.
To restore library configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Restore command is not available from the library OCP.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Save/Restore.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
4.
Click Restore.
NOTE: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
5.
Using the file chooser dialog box, locate the restore image file on the remote file system.
6.
When you have located the file and are ready to proceed, click Open.
114 Monitoring the library
NOTE: Because the management control blade (MCB) determines the name of the restore image file, you might not know the file name when you are searching for it on the remote file system. The file name always includes the library serial number, date stamp, and time stamp, in that order and separated by underscores.
An example file name might look like this:
213100020_2004-02-18_13.23.47.tar.gz
The serial number encoded in the image file must match the library serial number. A serial number mismatch will result in a message and the operation will not continue.
When image file compatibility has been established, the library reboots itself and continues with restoring the configuration. The reset operation could take minutes to complete. If you are near the library and can see the library OCP, normal behavior is when two working messages appear and the OCP goes dark when the LMC server restarts. From the remote client, a message appears that indicates that the LMC server is reconnecting to the client. After it reconnects, the LMC server performs a discovery.
If the restore operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the operation succeeded.
If the restore operation fails at any point, the library generates an event that contains details about the failure. Perform a revert or rescue operation to return the library to a stable configuration.
7.
After the restore operation has completed on the library, close and restart the remote client.
8.
If you have not done so already, make sure that the robotics are enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and output can continue.
Rescuing Library Configuration
Use the Rescue command to restore a library using the configuration rescue image that is saved locally on the library file system.
CAUTION: Be cautious if you plan to use a saved library configuration image that is out of date.
You might restore configuration information that you do not want, such as former passwords, partitions, mappings, and hardware configurations.
If library configuration has occurred since the last time the image was saved, those changes will be lost when the older configuration is restored. The restore operation will succeed, but you will then need to reconfigure the library, including the partitions and mappings. Therefore, it is important to save the local rescue and/or remote restore image periodically, especially following hardware configuration changes.
To rescue library configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator from the remote client. The Restore command is not available from the library OCP.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Save/Restore.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
Monitoring System Components 115
4.
Click Rescue.
NOTE: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
5.
At the prompt, make sure that all data input and output has stopped. Click Yes to continue.
When the system determines that it can reconfigure the library using the saved image, a message dialog box appears that informs you that the library will reboot itself. The reset could take minutes to complete. If you are near the library and can see the library OCP, normal behavior is when two working messages appear and the OCP goes dark when the LMC server restarts. From the remote client, a message appears that indicates that the LMC server is reconnecting to the client. After it reconnects, the LMC server performs a discovery.
As the MCB reboots, the MCB, LMC server, and robotics control unit (RCU) change to the configuration settings stored in the rescue image.
When the LMC has restarted, reconnected, and completed its discovery operation, a message appears that indicates that the library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the operation completed successfully.
If the operation fails at any point, the library generates an event that contains details about the failure. Perform a revert or rescue operation to return the library to a stable configuration.
6.
If you have not already done so, make sure that the robotics are enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and output can recommence.
Reverting Library Configuration
In the event that either a restore or rescue operation fails before completion and the library becomes unstable, the Revert command provides a way to roll back any library configuration changes that might have occurred during the operation. The Revert command is unavailable if no revert image is saved. On a new library, no revert image exists until a restore or rescue operation is attempted for the first time.
CAUTION: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the library shuts down. You must have physical access to the library to bring the library back up. If you are performing a restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote access, the library will remain shut down until the library is directly powered back on.
To revert library configuration:
1.
Log on as an administrator from the remote client or from the library OCP.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Save/Restore.
The Save and Restore Library Configuration dialog box appears.
116 Monitoring the library
4.
Click Revert.
NOTE: If the library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
5.
At the prompt, check whether all library data input and output has stopped. To continue, click
Yes.
When the system determines that it can reconfigure the library using the saved image, a message dialog box appears that informs you that the library will reboot itself. The reset could take minutes to complete. If you are near the library and can see the library OCP, normal behavior is when two working messages appear and the OCP goes dark when the LMC server restarts.
As the MCB reboots, the MCB, LMC server, and robotics control unit (RCU) change to the configuration settings stored in the rescue image.
When the LMC has restarted, reconnected, and completed its discovery operation, a message appears that indicates that the library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation succeeds, a message appears that indicates that the library has been restored to its previous configuration.
If the operation fails at any point, the library generates an event that contains details about the failure. Perform a revert or rescue to return the library to a stable configuration.
6.
If you have not already done so, make sure that the robotics are enabled and bring the library back online so that data input and output can recommence.
Emailing or Saving the Configuration Record
Use the Email Configuration Record dialog box to:
•
Send the configuration record to a selected e-mail address. See
•
Save the configuration record to a specified .txt file. See
“Saving the Configuration Record”
.
Before you can e-mail the configuration record, the library e-mail account must be configured. For information on configuring the library e-mail account, see
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47) .
NOTE: Only users with administrative privileges can e-mail or save the configuration record.
Emailing the Configuration Record
To e-mail the configuration record:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
From the menu bar, click Monitor
→Email Configuration Record.
The Email Configuration Record dialog box appears.
3.
Click Email and select or type in the destination e-mail address.
NOTE: You can only specify one e-mail address. If you need to send the configuration record to multiple destinations, repeat this procedure for each e-mail address.
4.
Use the Comment box to type any additional information you want to include in the e-mail message.
5.
Click OK to send the configuration record and your comment text to the specified e-mail address and close the Email Configuration Record dialog box.
The e-mail message includes both the configuration record information and your comments as embedded text, with Library Configuration Information as the subject.
Monitoring System Components 117
Saving the Configuration Record
To save the configuration record:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
From the menu bar, click Monitor
→Email Configuration Record.
The Email Configuration Record dialog box appears.
3.
Click Save, and use the Browse function to specify location for the file, type in the file name, then select the file type (default is .txt).
4.
Click OK to save the configuration record to the specified location and close the Email
Configuration Record dialog box.
Monitoring user status
The Users Status dialog box displays information about users currently logged onto the library.
You can monitor user status while either viewing the physical library or partition. You must log in as an admin user or service user to access the User Status information.
To view user status information:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
From the View menu or in the Managed Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library or appropriate partition.
3.
Click Monitor
→Users.
The Users Status dialog box appears, and displays
for each user logged onto the library.
Table 28 User Status Dialog Box
Element
Name
Role
Host
IP
Description
The name of the user who is currently logged on to the library.
The type of user (for example, User or Admin).
The name of the host computer from which the user is connected to the library.
The IP address of the host computer.
118 Monitoring the library
Table 28 User Status Dialog Box (continued)
Element
OS
OS User
Description
The host computer operating system.
The name of the user who is currently logged on to the host computer.
4.
To refresh the information displayed in the dialog box, click Refresh.
5.
Click Close to exit the Users Status dialog box.
Monitoring Partitions Status
If you want to see settings and information for a partition but do not need to make changes, view partition details. Unlike modifying a partition, viewing details does not require you to take a partition offline.
To monitor partitions status:
1.
From the View menu or in the Managed Views section of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
On the menu bar, click Monitor
→Partitions.
The Partitions Status dialog box appears with a list of all logical partitions in the library and information about each partition.
describes the elements on the Partitions Status dialog box.
Table 29 Partitions Status Dialog Box
Element
Name
Status
Media Type
Interface
# Drives
# Storage Slots
# I/E Slots
Barcode Restrictions
Media Identifier
Drive Autolevel
Auto Drive Clean
LCP WWPN
Description
The name of the partition.
The status of the partition (Online or Offline).
The type of media used in the partition (LTO-4 or LTO-5).
The type of interface used to connect to the host (FC).
The number of tapes drives in the partition.
The number of storage slots in the partition
The number of I/E station slots in the partition.
The current setting for barcode restrictions (Enforce
Restrictions, No Restrictions, or Full Restrictions).
The current setting for return media identifier (Suffix,
Pass Through, Prefix, or Disabled).
The current setting for drive firmware autoleveling
(Enabled or Disabled).
The current setting for automatic drive cleaning (Enabled or Disabled).
The world wide port name of the library control path.
3.
Click Close to close the Partitions Status dialog box.
Viewing partition status details
The Partition Details dialog box displays status information for partitions on your library.
To view status details about partitions
Monitoring System Components 119
1.
From the View menu or in the Managed Views section of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
On the menu bar, click Monitor
→Partitions.
3.
Click the partition to view in the list, and then click Details.
General information about the partition displays, including the partition name, status, serial number, and media type; number of drives, storage slots and I/E slots in the partition; barcode restrictions, return media identifier, autolevel status, drive cleaning status, and the LCP WWPN.
4.
Click Close to close the Partition Details dialog box.
5.
Click Close to close the Partitions Status dialog box.
Monitoring Key Management
If the library is enrolled with ESKM key management servers, you can view ESKM server and certificate information and e-mail, save, or print it. To do so:
1.
Click Monitor
→Key Management to display the Enterprise Secure Key Manager Server
Information dialog box.
The dialog box lists the following information:
•
For each ESKM server, the node address
•
For each ESKM server, the tier number
•
For each ESKM server, the node number
•
For each certificate, the type (Certificate Authority (CA) or Client)
•
For each certificate, the location
•
For each certificate, the serial number
•
For each certificate, the dates during which the certificate is valid
•
For each certificate, the status of the certificate (Valid or Invalid)
•
For each certificate, the certificate issuer and subject
2.
To e-mail, save, or print the information: a.
Click Send to display the Email, Save or Print Table dialog box.
b.
Select the radio button next to Email, Save, or Print.
c.
If you selected Email, type the e-mail address of the recipient into the Email field, or select it from the pull-down menu. Type a message in the Comment field, if appropriate.
d.
If you selected Save, indicate the location and file name by one of the following methods:
•
Type the file path and name into the Save field.
•
Browse to the location to save the file, type the correct value in the File Name field, select the appropriate option in the Files of Type field from the pull-down menu, then click Open.
either e.
Click OK.
3.
Click Close to exit the Enterprise Secure Key Manager Server Information dialog box.
Creating Support Tickets
Support tickets are generated when a hardware problem is detected. The ticket provides information that helps diagnose and resolve the problem. When a support ticket is generated, the library collects configuration information and executes a Device Analysis test on the selected device. The information is saved as a *.tgz file containing *.ltd data files for each device in the support ticket.
The .tgz file can be e-mailed or saved to a disk.
To configure and save a support ticket:
120 Monitoring the library
1.
Click Tools
→Support Tickets to display the Welcome screen of the Support Ticket Wizard.
2.
Click Next.
3.
Select the appropriate radio button to indicate whether the report is e-mailed or saved as a file.
•
If you select Email, type in or select from the drop-down list the e-mail address of the recipient.
•
If you select File, browse to the file location then specify the file name.
4.
In the Component Selection section of the dialog box, clear and check the boxes to indicate which components will be included in the Support Ticket.
5.
Click Next.
6.
In the Components Selected area of the Confirmation dialog box, scroll through the list to ensure you have selected the correct components. If any are incorrect, use the Back button and make the appropriate changes.
7.
After the component selection is verified, read the Note in the dialog box, select the Continue with Support Ticket generation box, and click Finish.
The Support Ticket is generated and sent to the specified email address or file location.
8.
Click OK in the Support Ticket complete dialog box.
Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information
The Send button on each status dialog box enables you to send status information to e-mail addresses. If you are accessing the LMC from a remote client, Send also enables you to save the information to a file or print it. You cannot save or print information from the library OCP. The information that is sent will be the same as what displays in the status dialog box at the time you click Send.
NOTE: Before you perform the following procedure, make sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that the library can send information to the recipient. See
To mail, save, and print status information:
1.
Make sure that the status dialog box displays the status information that you want to send.
2.
Click Send.
The Email, Save or Print Table dialog box appears.
3.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
To indicate that you want to send the information as an e-mail message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail address in the Email text box or select an
Emailing, Saving, and Printing Status Information 121
existing address from the drop-down list. If appropriate, type a comment in the Comment text box to send with the information.
•
To save the information, select Save, then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which you want the information saved, or click Browse to specify a location and a file name.
NOTE: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
•
To indicate that you want to send the information to a printer, select Print.
NOTE: The Print option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
4.
To send, click OK.
122 Monitoring the library
5 Maintaining the library
This chapter describes common library maintenance operations.
NOTE: If you are experiencing system problems, check subsystems and components before looking for a service event or contacting technical support. Your service representative might ask you to check these things or, if you are an administrator, you might be asked to run a diagnostic procedure or upload new firmware.
Configuring and Testing Drives
The Drives dialog box enables you to do the following:
•
Set speed and connection parameters
•
Reset drives
•
Cycle power to drives
•
Take drives online or offline
•
Identify drives
•
Run a pass/fail test for LTO-type drives
•
Eject tape cartridges from drives
•
Send drive logs by e-mail or save them
•
Clean drives
Viewing the Drive dialog box
Drive information on this dialog box is automatically refreshed whenever a drive is added or removed.
To use the Drive dialog box:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Drives.
The Drives dialog box appears.
Configuring and Testing Drives 123
describes the elements on the Drives dialog box.
Table 30 Drives Dialog Box
Description Element
In the Drive(s) area:
Drive Type drop-down list
State
Drive Type
Location
Health
WWN
Barcode
Partition Name
Serial #
Firmware Version
In the Control area:
Enables you to select the type of drives to list on the
Drives dialog box (for example, LTO4 for LTO-4 tape drives). All lists every drive in the library.
The state of the drive (Varied On or Varied Off).
The type of drive (for example, LTO-5 - FC).
The location of the drive by means of a coordinate system. For information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
The status of the drive as reported by the event system
(for example, Good or Failed).
Indicates the World Wide Name of the drive.
If a cartridge is loaded in the specified drive, the barcode number of the cartridge.
The name of the partition to which the drive is assigned.
The serial number of the drive.
The drive firmware version.
124 Maintaining the library
Table 30 Drives Dialog Box (continued)
Element
Power Cycle
Reset Drive
Vary Off or Vary On
Identify
Self Test
Eject
Support Ticket
Clean
Details
Cancel
Help
Description
Cycles power to the specified drive by removing the power and then restoring it. Try to reset drives before you cycle power to them.
Resets the specified drive without cycling the power.
Varies off or varies on the specified drive. The label of the button toggles between Vary Off and Vary On. Each use of this button updates the drive information in the
Drive(s) area. Use this button to hot swap drives.
Causes a status LED on the back of the specified drive to blink rapidly so that you can identify it. When you click Identify, a message appears that informs you that you can now identify the drive by the rapidly blinking
LED on the back of it. After you find the drive, click OK to stop the rapid blinking.
Runs a pass/fail test on the specified drive.
Ejects any currently loaded tape from the specified drive.
Enables you to e-mail or save a Support Ticket (see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing Test Logs” (page 153) ).
Enables the drive cleaning process (see
).
Displays the Drive Details dialog box for the selected drive. See
“Viewing Drive Details” (page 125)
for more information.
Closes the dialog box.
Displays context-specific Online Help.
4.
In the Drive(s) area, click the appropriate drive row to highlight it.
5.
Perform operations in the Control area of the Drives dialog box.
Viewing Drive Details
To view drive details:
1.
On the Drives dialog box in the Drive(s) area, click the appropriate drive row to highlight it.
2.
Click Details.
The Drive Details dialog box appears.
The Drive Details region of the Drive Details dialog box displays detailed information about the selected drive.
describes the elements that appear in this region. For descriptions of elements in the Control area, see
“Configuring and Testing Drives” (page 123) .
Table 31 Drive Details Dialog Box
Element
Drive Model
Vendor
Firmware Level
Physical SN
Description
The brand name of the drive model.
The drive vendor.
The firmware version that is currently installed on the drive.
The serial number of the drive.
Configuring and Testing Drives 125
Table 31 Drive Details Dialog Box (continued)
Element
Logical SN
Description
The logical serial number that the library assigns to a drive in a specific location. This is not the serial number of the particular drive (see Physical SN in this table).
If a drive is replaced by another drive in the same library location, the logical serial number remains the same.
From the host's perspective, the replacement drive is the same as the original one.
If the logical serial number addressing feature is disabled for the library, Disabled appears in this field.
Location
Drive Type
Interface Type
WWN
Assigned LUN
Online Status
Drive Error Code
Health Status
Fibre Channel Loop ID
Fibre Channel Loop ID Mode
Number of Loads
Read Errors
Write Errors
Megabytes Read
Megabytes Written
The location of the drive by means of a coordinate system. For information about location coordinates, see
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
The type of drive (for example, LTO4 for LTO-4 tape drives).
The type of interface (FC).
The World Wide Name of the drive.
The assigned logical unit number.
The status of the drive (Varied On or Varied Off).
If the drive currently has no errors, No Error appears in this field.
If the library is unable to acquire a drive error code, such as when the robotics are disabled, Unavailable appears in this field.
The status of the drive as reported by the event system
(for example, Good or Failed).
For Fibre drives only, the loop ID assigned to the drive.
For Fibre drives only, the way in which the loop ID is assigned to the drive (Hard or Soft).
The number of loads during the drive history in this library.
The number of read errors that have occurred during the drive history in this library.
The number of write errors that have occurred during the drive history in this library.
The amount of data in megabytes that the drive has read during its history in this library.
The amount of data in megabytes that the drive has written during its history in this library.
3.
To return to the Drives dialog box, click Cancel.
Emailing and Saving Support Tickets
To mail and save drive logs:
126 Maintaining the library
1.
From the Drives dialog box, click Support Ticket.
The Email or Save Support Ticket dialog box appears.
2.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
To send the Support Ticket as an e-mail message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail address in the Email text box or select an existing address from the drop-down list. Type a comment in the Comment text box to send with the log.
•
To save the Support Ticket, select Save, and then either type in the Save text box a path and a file name to which you want the information saved, or click Browse to specify a location and a file name.
NOTE: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
Cleaning a Drive
Use the Drives dialog box to manually initiate a drive cleaning operation. When cleaning a drive, use cleaning media inserted in the I/E station or media in an assigned cleaning magazine.
NOTE: If the host application coordinates drive cleaning, or if automatic drive cleaning is enabled for the partition, you do not need to manually initiate a drive cleaning operation to perform routine cleaning tasks. In these cases, routine cleaning is handled by the host application or the library, and you should manually initiate a drive cleaning operation only as part of a troubleshooting procedure.
Before you manually initiate a drive cleaning operation, add cleaning media to the library.
There are two ways to add cleaning media to the library:
•
Insert cleaning media into the I/E station and close the I/E station door.
•
Configure drive cleaning by assigning cleaning magazines and importing cleaning media.
(See
“Configuring Drive Cleaning” (page 56)
.)
After adding cleaning media to the library, manually initiate a drive cleaning operation:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Drives to display the Drives dialog box.
2.
Click a drive in the list, and then click Clean.
The Clean Drive dialog box appears.
Configuring and Testing Drives 127
3.
Under Cleaning Source, click an option:
•
To use cleaning media inserted in the I/E station, click Use Media in I/E Station, and then click to select a piece of cleaning media in the list.
•
To use cleaning media in an assigned cleaning magazine, click Use Media in Cleaning
Slots.
4.
Click OK.
The drive cleaning operation is initiated, and the Clean Drive dialog box closes. Once the cleaning operation completes, the cleaning media is returned to the I/E station or assigned cleaning magazine.
NOTE: The system does not display a message when the cleaning operation is completed.
Saving a Report Template
To generate a Report, a template is required. Loading the template recalls saved report criteria and lets you quickly generate a report based on the saved criteria.
You can generate both an Events Report and a Media Integrity Analysis Report. For more information, see
“Generate an Events Report” (page 129)
and
“Generate a Media Integrity Analysis
.
Create an Events Report Template
To create an Events Report Template:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→ Reports→ Events.
The Event Report dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Events Report.
3.
Under Templates, click Save.
128 Maintaining the library
NOTE: The Save button appears grayed-out until a change is made in the Specify Report
Criteria region of the dialog box.
4.
Type a name for the template, and then click OK.
The template appears in the list under Templates.
5.
To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in the list, and then click
View to generate the report.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Create a Media Integrity Analysis Report Template
To create a Media Integrity Analysis Report Template:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→ Reports→ Media→ Tape Alert History.
The Tape Alert History Report dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Media Integrity Analysis Report.
3.
Under Templates, click Save.
NOTE: The Save button appears grayed-out until a change is made in the Specify Report
Criteria region of the dialog box.
4.
Type a name for the template, and then click OK.
The template appears in the list under Templates.
5.
To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in the list, and then click
View to generate the report.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Generate an Events Report
To generate an Events Report:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→ Reports→ Events.
The Event Report dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Events Report.
3.
Under Templates, click Save if desired.
NOTE: The Save button appears grayed-out until a change is made in the Specify Report
Criteria region of the dialog box.
4.
To display the report on the LMC, click View.
5.
To save the data as a comma separated values (.csv) file, click Export. The .csv file can be saved to a local hard drive or e-mailed to a specific address.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Generate a Media Integrity Analysis Report
To generate a Media Integrity Analysis Report:
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→ Reports→Media→ Tape Alert History.
The Tape Alert History Report dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Media Integrity Analysis Report.
3.
Under Templates, click Save if desired.
Saving a Report Template 129
NOTE: The Save button appears grayed-out until a change is made in the Specify Report
Criteria region of the dialog box.
4.
To display the report on the LMC, click View.
5.
To save the data as a comma separated values (.csv) file, click Export. The .csv file can be saved to a local hard drive or e-mailed to a specific address.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Teaching the Library (Configuration and Calibration)
The Teach command enables you to update the stored library configuration and calibration information. Use this command after you replace a library component or whenever you need to assess the position and alignment of library components or the physical library configuration (such as the number of modules and I/E stations, the locations of storage magazines and drives, and the types of media used in the library).
You can configure the library to automatically perform the full teach routine (configuration and calibration) whenever the library power is cycled. For more information, see
.
Running Configuration Teach
Starting the configuration teach process causes the library to assess its contents, gathering information as follows:
•
Number of modules
•
Types of media
•
Storage magazine locations
•
Number of I/E stations and magazine type
•
Types of drives
•
Drive locations
If you change the physical library configuration in any of these areas, you should initiate the configuration teach process (for example, when you add or remove storage or remove storage to add another component). The library will automatically perform a configuration teach, calibration teach, and inventory when an expansion module is added.
NOTE: The library automatically performs an inventory after it completes the configuration teach process.
To run configuration teach:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Teach.
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The Teach dialog box appears.
130 Maintaining the library
Configure is already selected by default.
4.
Click Start.
During the configuration teach process, the picker moves to each storage magazine, I/E magazine, and drive in the library and stores information about them. Teach results appear in the Results text box when the process completes. If the configuration teach process completes successfully, the Teach dialog box might close automatically.
Running Calibration Teach
Starting the calibration teach process causes the library to assess the position and alignment of various library components through the use of calibration targets. Use this process to avoid cartridge-handling problems caused by rack, drive, or I/E station misalignments.
Rack alignment calibration targets are tabs that are located on two special magazines in each drive-side and door-side storage rack. I/E station targets are small square holes that are located at the top and bottom of the I/E station. Whenever you perform work on the library that could affect the position of rack, drive, or I/E station calibration targets, even slightly, you should initiate the calibration teach process.
NOTE: When the library reaches 20,000 moves after the last calibration occurred, and if then the library is rebooted or an access door is closed, the library automatically re-calibrates itself.
To run calibration teach:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Teach.
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The Teach dialog box appears with Configure selected by default.
Teaching the Library (Configuration and Calibration) 131
4.
Select Calibrate.
5.
Click Start.
During the calibration teach process, the picker moves to the home position, which is X-Y coordinate position 0,0. Then, for each rack of each module, the picker moves to a magazine at the top and one at the bottom and stores those positions in coordinates relative to the 0,0 position. Teach results appear in the Results area when the process completes. If the calibration teach process completes successfully, the Teach dialog box might close automatically.
NOTE: Use the Physical Library command on the Setup menu to disable or enable automatic inventory after a calibration teach.
Working with Verification Tests
A collection of verification tests are available to assist you or a customer service engineer (CSE) in determining whether the library is properly installed, configured, and operational. Running the tests is an important part of ensuring that the system is working correctly. See
NOTE: Because resolving an issue often involves complex technical procedures, such as removing and replacing FRUs, and because verification tests often require preparation and trained interpretation of results, it is recommended that a CSE perform the tests.
The following types of verification tests are available:
•
Installation verification tests
•
Partial system tests
•
FRU operation tests
•
Custom tests
The verification tests provide the following:
•
Fully automated tests
•
Tests to determine marginality of installation
•
Detailed problem analysis
•
Full system tests or individual field replaceable unit (FRU) tests
•
Logs of installation and configuration tests
•
Graphical reports showing passed, marginal, and failed results
•
No affect to integrity of data
To perform these tests, the picker assembly must be ready and functional, and the library must be powered on. In addition, the library must be in an offline state, and at least one scratch tape must be inserted in the I/E station.
Verification Test Descriptions
Installation Verification Test
The installation verification test enables you to verify that the library installation and configuration is complete and functioning correctly. The installation verification test runs the following individual tests:
•
Library alignment test
•
Picker assembly test
•
I/E station assembly test
132 Maintaining the library
•
Get/Put test
•
Scanner fiducial test
A smaller library configuration will require about 1 hour. Larger configurations will require as long as 6 hours to run the installation verification test. The time to complete individual tests on an 8-frame configuration is approximately:
•
Library alignment test - 30 minutes
•
Picker assembly test - 1 minute
•
I/E station assembly test - 5 minutes for each 24 slot I/E station
•
Get/Put test - 120 minutes
•
Scanner fiducial test - 75 minutes
Partial System Tests
The partial system tests perform the selected sub-tests to test an area or range of the library configuration. The selectable tests include:
•
Frame test - This test includes the same individual tests as the installation verification test, but enables you to specify a range of modules rather than testing all modules.
•
Configuration test - This test includes the picker assembly and scanner fiducial tests.
Both tests enable you to select a range of modules and racks to test. For example, if you have a
4-module library, you can select to test only modules 3 and 4. The frame test performs the same operations as the installation verification test, except there are frame and rack range parameters available.
FRU Operational Tests
The FRU operational tests enable you to verify the replacement of a FRU. When the FRU test is selected, you can select any of the following individual tests:
•
Accessor assembly
•
Picker assembly
•
Drive sled assembly
•
I/E assembly
•
Scan barcode
When one of the sub-tests is selected, you may be prompted to enter additional information.
Custom Library Alignment Tests
The custom tests enable you to run a sub-test that is normally part of the larger tests that call multiple sub-tests (including Installation and Partial).
See
“Verification Test Functions” (page 133)
for more specific information about each sub-test.
Verification Test Functions
Use the Verification Tests dialog box to run tests and view results.
shows the parts of the Verification Tests dialog box. To display the dialog box, click Tools
→Library
Diagnostics
→Verification Tests.
Working with Verification Tests 133
Figure 19 Verification Tests Dialog Box
Library Alignment Test
The library alignment test performs the following tasks:
•
Performs accessor X-axis and Y-axis travel test (also calls the FRU accessor assembly test)
•
Calibrates library and checks calibration offsets by comparing them to the default values for the drives and I/E stations
•
Checks magazine offsets
•
Checks collected offset alignments for magazines, I/E stations, and drive sleds
•
Checks joint alignment quality
Get/Put Test
The library alignment test performs the following tasks:
•
Performs a Get/Put of a scratch tape in the top and bottom slots of each magazine that supports the scratch tape media
•
Performs a Get/Put of existing media if no scratch tape is found or if the top or bottom is occupied
•
Moves a scratch tape to one row in each frame to test cross-frame alignment
•
Uses a scratch tape to perform a Get/Put in each compatible drive
134 Maintaining the library
Accessor Assembly Test
The accessor assembly test performs the following tasks:
•
Checks for the module terminator (the terminator on the LBX board in the last expansion module)
•
Checks the joint alignment (makes sure all the joints on the X-axis are flush)
•
Performs two passes around the library to ensure that the X-axis and Y-axis encoders are reading correctly and the belts are not slipping
•
Tests the calibration sensor
•
Checks the alignment of the accessor to the control module
Picker Assembly Test
The picker assembly test performs the following tasks:
•
Performs pivot left and right check
•
Performs reach and retract five times
•
If the LMC gets its side done, performs a Get/Put of the selected cell
•
Scans the control module serial number to make sure the scanner is reading properly
Drive Sled Assembly Test
The drive sled assembly test performs the following tasks:
•
Calibrates the drive sled
•
Checks the quality of the sled fiducial
•
Performs Get/Put to the drive
Scan Barcode Test
The scan barcode test performs the following tasks:
•
Moves to selected cell coordinate and scans the barcode label
•
Checks to ensure the label reads the same from top to bottom
•
Verifies the quality of the barcode labels and checks to make sure barcode labels are in a readable position
I/E Station Assembly Test
The I/E station assembly test performs the following tasks:
•
Locks and unlocks the I/E station
•
Calibrates the I/E station and check offsets collected
•
Checks each magazine fiducial in the I/E station
•
Performs Get/Put tests on all the I/E station cells
Scanner Fiducial Test
The scanner fiducial test performs the following tasks:
•
Scans and checks each magazine fiducial
•
Scans and checks each drive sled fiducial
•
Tests the calibration sensor
•
Calibrates and checks repeatability, up to three times for marginal and failed calibration targets
Working with Verification Tests 135
Initiating Verification Tests
This section provides instructions for running the installation verification test, partial tests, FRU operational tests, and custom tests. The test results appear after the tests complete.
To stop a test, disable the robotics by pressing the Robotics Enable button on the OCP or by clicking
Stop on the Verification Tests dialog box. Control will be returned to you as soon as the current command is completed.
The different reports (Library Report, Drive Report, and Blade Report) are generated and viewed in the Reports area of the Verification Tests dialog box.
If a typical user logs on while an administrator is logged on and running a verification test, testing will continue unaffected. Only one administrator can be logged on at any given time.
Running the Installation Verification Test
When the installation verification test is running, no one else can log on to the library. The message
Verification Test is Running appears in the Activity area of the main LMC display.
To run the installation verification test:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Verification Tests.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears.
4.
From the Select Test drop-down list, click Install.
5.
Click Start.
6.
If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
The IVT Pre-Test Questionnaire appears.
136 Maintaining the library
7.
Complete the pre-test questionnaire by clicking inside the box next to the questions.
You cannot continue with the installation verification test until you have completed and verified the question requests on this questionnaire.
NOTE: Make sure you physically verify each of the questions on the questionnaire. Each of the items listed can cause the installation verification test to have unexpected behavior and unreliable results. The tests must be re-run if they fail.
8.
After you complete the questionnaire, click Next.
An Attention dialog box appears, instructing you to insert a scratch cartridge in the I/E station.
9.
Insert a scratch cartridge into the I/E station, then click Next.
NOTE: Make sure that the scratch tapes are formatted and contain no data that cannot be overwritten. Scratch tapes must have barcode labels with valid volume serial numbers on them. Also, you might find it useful to write down the serial numbers so that you can identify your scratch tapes.
This procedure will not damage any cartridges that are already installed in the library.
If the scratch cartridge becomes lodged in a drive or magazine, it must be manually removed from the library. If not removed, the cartridge will become part of the partition the next time the accessor assembly is enabled.
The I/E station will be locked until the inventory is complete.
10.
Select a scratch cartridge of each media type (for example, LTO-4 and LTO-5) in the library.
Working with Verification Tests 137
NOTE: You can select one scratch cartridge per media type. Each test that requires a scratch cartridge will call the media types as needed.
11.
After you select the cartridges, click Finish.
As the tests run, the library will generate events if problems are discovered. You must close the Verification Tests dialog box to view those events. Return to the Verification Tests dialog box to view test results.
12.
After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
The report window appears with the Graphical tab displayed.
•
Use the Graphical tab to view graphical reports and to quickly identify areas where marginal or failed results occurred.
•
Use the toolbar to navigate between graphical reports or to save the results in PDF format.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
Graphical Reports” (page 147) .
13.
For more detailed test results, click the Text tab to view the test log generated by the LMC.
14.
Review the test log to find marginal or failed test results, and to see troubleshooting information.
For information about how to interpret test logs, see
“Verification Test Logs” (page 150) .
15.
To e-mail, print, or save the test log as a text file, in the Tools region of the Text view click
Send, then specify the output location. For more information, see
Printing Test Logs” (page 153) .
138 Maintaining the library
16.
To see the results for a previous test, click to select the test name in the Test Results region of the dialog box, then click Reports. The LMC saves the most recent five test results.
17.
When you are finished working with the test results, click Close to close the result window.
18.
If you are finished performing verification tests, click Close to close the Verification Tests dialog box.
Partial Tests
To perform partial tests:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Verification Tests.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears.
4.
From the Select Test drop-down list, click Partial.
5.
From the Select Sub-test drop-down list, click either Frame or Configuration or both. A check mark indicates the test is selected.
6.
Click Start.
Working with Verification Tests 139
7.
If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
An Attention dialog box appears.
8.
Select either Continue With Scratch Tapes or Continue Without Scratch Tapes, and then click
Next.
9.
If you selected Continue With Scratch Tapes: a.
If there is no scratch cartridge in the I/E station, insert one now, then click Next.
NOTE: Make sure that scratch tapes are formatted and contain no data that cannot be overwritten. Scratch tapes must have barcode labels with valid volume serial numbers on them. Also, you might find it useful to write down the serial number so that you can identify your scratch tapes.
This procedure will not damage any cartridges that are already installed in the library.
If the scratch cartridge becomes lodged in a drive or magazine, it must be manually removed from the library. If not removed, the cartridge will become part of the partition the next time the accessor assembly is enabled.
The I/E station will be locked until the inventory is complete.
b.
To shorten the list of cartridges in Selected Tapes in I/E Stations, use the Media Barcode
Filter.
c.
Click to select a scratch cartridge of each media type listed in the Selected Tapes in I/E
Stations dialog box, then click Next.
NOTE: Select one scratch cartridge per media type. Each test that requires a scratch cartridge will call the media types as needed.
10.
Make the appropriate selections in the Frame Text and/or Configuration Test regions of the
Attention dialog box, then click Finish. (The regions appear based on what type of test you selected earlier. The following example shows both the frame and configuration tests because both were selected.)
140 Maintaining the library
Test progress is shown in the Verification Tests dialog box.
11.
After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
.
For information about how to interpret test logs, see
“Verification Test Logs” (page 150) .
For information about how to e-mail, print, or save text logs, see
Printing Test Logs” (page 153) .
FRU Operational Tests
There are two ways to run the FRU operational tests. You can select the FRU test from the Verification
Tests dialog box, or if that FRU is supported by the verification tests you can run the test from the
Events dialog box. This section explains both procedures.
The screens displayed by the FRU operational tests vary, depending on which sub-test is selected.
For example, if you click Picker Assembly, I/E Assembly, or Drive Sled Assembly, then click Start, the Select Scratch Tapes dialog box appears.
To run FRU operational tests from the Verification Tests dialog box:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Verification Tests.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears.
FRU tests are available for the Accessor Assembly, Picker Assembly, Drive Sled Assembly, I/E
Assembly, and Scan Barcode. You can only test one FRU at a time.
The following steps provide instructions for running the Scan Barcode test. The other tests provide similar windows and functionality for the other FRUs.
4.
From the Select Test drop-down list, click FRU.
5.
From the Select Sub-test drop-down list, click Scan Barcode.
6.
Click Start.
7.
If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
The Attention Select an Element dialog box appears.
Working with Verification Tests 141
This dialog box enables you to enter any coordinate address in the library (aisle, module, rack, section, column, and row). The address does not need to be occupied by a drive or cartridge.
8.
Click Finish.
Test progress is shown in the Verification Tests dialog box in the Test Results region of the screen.
142 Maintaining the library
9.
After the test is complete, click Reports to view the test results.
For more information about how to work with graphical reports, see
.
For information about how to interpret test logs, see
“Verification Test Logs” (page 150) .
For information about how to e-mail, print, or save text logs, see
“Emailing, Saving, and Printing
.
To run FRU operational tests from the Events dialog box:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Event Viewer.
4.
From the Events dialog box, click the categories of the event logs you want to view in the
Select State, Select Severity, and Select Sub-system regions of the dialog box.
Working with Verification Tests 143
5.
Click OK to dislay the events, if any, in the Event List dialog box.
6.
Click an event to display in the Select Event region of the dialog box, and then click Details.
7.
From the Event Details dialog box, click FRU Test to display the Verification Test dialog box.
8.
After the FRU test successfully verifies that the FRU has PASSED or is MARGINAL, all events associated with the failure are transitioned to the Verify state.
Running custom tests
The custom tests allow you to run a sub-test that is normally part of the larger tests that call multiple sub-tests—such as Installation or Partial.
144 Maintaining the library
To run custom tests:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
Tools
→Library Diagnostics→Verification Tests.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears.
3.
From the Select Test drop-down list, click Custom.
The Select Sub-test field defaults to the Library Alignment sub-test and cannot be changed.
4.
Click Start.
5.
If prompted to take the library offline, click Yes.
The Attention dialog box appears.
6.
Select the number of the module and racks where the you want to perform the tests.
7.
Click Finish.
The test progress appears in the Verification Tests dialog box.
8.
After the test is complete, the test name and results summary displays in the Test Results region of the dialog box. Click Reports to view detailed test results.
Understanding the Verification Test Inventory
The verification tests generate inventory lists that provide specific information about the library configurations. Inventory lists for the library, drives, and blades are available. On the Verification
Test dialog box, select the type of inventory list that you want to see (Library, Drive, or Blade).
The results of all sub-tests are displayed on the Verification Tests dialog box after each individual test is completed. To understand the results, see
Library Inventory
This inventory list provides the following statistical information:
•
Library Serial Number
•
Library Firmware Version
•
Library WWN Base
•
Power Supply Count
•
IEX Count
•
LSC Count
•
Frame Count
•
CMB Count (Control Management Blade)
•
EEB Count
•
MCB Count (Management Control Blade)
•
LMD Count
•
LGR Count
•
For each EEB: EEB App Fwr Version, EEB Serial Number, and EEB Location
•
LMD Serial Number
•
Frame Serial Number
•
Frame Location (for example “in Module 1”)
•
For each power supply: Power Supply Serial Number and Power Supply Location
Working with Verification Tests 145
•
For each CMB: CMB App Fwr Version, CMB Boot Fwr Version, CMB PIP Fwr Version, CMB
Serial Number, and CMB Location
•
For each MCB: MCB App Fwr Version, MCB Boot Fwr Version, MCB PIP Fwr Version, MCB
Serial Number, and MCB Location
•
LGR Serial Number
•
LSC Serial Number
•
Number of Cartridges
•
Number of I/E Stations
•
Number of Frames
•
Number of Drives
•
Number of Aisles
•
Storage Magazine Count
•
IP Magazine Count
•
For each type of drive: Drive Count
Drive Inventory
This inventory list provides the following information about each drive:
•
Drive Type
•
Interface (FIBRE)
•
Physical SN
•
Logical SN
•
FW Version
•
Sled SN
•
Sled App Version
•
Sled Boot FW
Test Results
The results of all sub-tests appear on the Verification Tests dialog box after each individual test is completed. See
for an explanation of test results.
Table 32 Test Results
Test Results
PASSED
MARGINAL
FAILED
INCOMPLETE
Explanation
Completed the test without reported errors.
Completed the test, but the system had to retry or had to skip part of the test. A MARGINAL result is considered PASSED, but the log should be checked to see if the marginality can be corrected.
An error has been found and needs to be corrected. A fatal error, or an error that causes a part of the system to become disabled, will halt the test.
This portion of a test was incomplete due to an interruption or a portion of the test was run (for example, no scratch tape was used so must only use existing tapes). An incomplete will occur when the door is opened, an abort command is issued, or when the Robotics
Enable button is pressed.
146 Maintaining the library
Table 32 Test Results (continued)
Test Results
SKIPPED
WARNING
STOPPED
Explanation
This portion of the test was skipped. The cause is that either a scratch tape was not present or the library was not configured for the test.
A warning is additional information about the test that the user should know. For example, if a calibration failed, but the stored offsets are analyzed, a warning should be posted that states that the offset check might not be accurate.
The test was interrupted. The log will show the result to provide a record of test interruption.
NOTE: A single problem in the library can cause failed results in multiple tests. After taking action to correct a failed result, run tests that yielded marginal or failed results again.
Verification Test Graphical Reports
Some verification tests produce graphical reports that let you easily see if the test generated PASSED,
MARGINAL, or FAILED results. Each result is shown in a different color:
•
P - passed (green)
•
M - marginal (yellow)
•
F - failed (red)
There are 8 types of graphical reports. Each individual test generates 2 or more graphical reports
(except for the scan barcode test, which does not generate graphical reports). The following sections show an example of each type of graphical report and actions to take to correct a marginal or failed result.
To view the graphical reports for a test, click Reports on the Verification Tests dialog box.
Joint Alignments
The joint alignment graphical report shows the results for tests of alignment between frames. It also shows the results for tests of accessor travel to all corners of the library.
•
If the graphical report shows one or more failed results for joint alignment, realign the middle
X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
•
If all the joints passed testing but accessor movement failed, manually move the accessor down the aisle in each direction to locate any places where motion of the accessor is not smooth or is restricted. Then realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom
X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
Vertical Alignments
The vertical alignments graphical report shows the results for test of vertical alignment of tape magazines on the drive-side and door-side of each frame, and for vertical alignment of each I/E station.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the drive-side or door-side, make sure that all tape magazines are installed properly on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the magazines.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
•
If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
Working with Verification Tests 147
Horizontal Alignments
The horizontal alignments graphical report shows the results for tests of horizontal alignment of tape magazines on the drive-side and door-side across frames, and for horizontal alignment of
I/E stations across frames.
NOTE: This graphical report is not generated for libraries with only one frame.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the drive-side or door-side, make sure that all tape magazines are installed properly on that side and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the magazines.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
•
If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
Calibration Offsets
The calibration offsets graphical report shows the results for tests of tape magazine, drive sled, and I/E station offsets compared to predefined tolerances. Reports are generated for drive-side and door-side for all frames.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure are installed properly and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the magazines.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
•
If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
Boundary/Accessibility
The boundary/accessibility graphical report shows the results for tests of the accessor while performing Get, Put, and Scan functions for all tape magazines and drive sleds. (This tests whether magazines and sleds are within the maximum allowable movement range of the accessor.)
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure are installed properly and that the calibration targets are correctly snapped on to the magazines.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for the I/E station, make sure the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
•
If running the test again still generates failed results, realign the middle X-axis rail and check the alignment of the top and bottom X-axis rails at the location of the failure.
Get/Put
The Get/Put graphical report shows the results for tests of the picker assembly while performing one Get and one Put function for each tape magazine. The picker will use the selected scratch tape or the existing tape if it finds one at the target.
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, make sure the magazines at the location of the failure are installed properly.
•
If there are multiple marginal results in an area, review the area to make sure it is not prone to problems. Also run the library alignment test (part of the installation verification or partial frame test) to make sure the library is level.
148 Maintaining the library
•
If there are a large number of issues, use rubbing alcohol to clean the picker fingers and the detents in the side of the tapes.
•
If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker assembly.
Scan Fiducials
The scan fiducials graphical report shows the results for tests of the fiducial barcode on each tape magazine and drive sled, including the width, expected Y position (shift), and the number of hits the scanner receives while traveling up and down. (Only known magazines are tested.)
•
If the graphical report shows a failed result for one or more tape magazines, replace the affected magazines.
•
If there are multiple marginal or failed results, run the library alignment test (part of the installation verification or partial frame test) to make sure the library is level.
•
If the library is level and there are multiple marginal or failed results, the scanner should be inspected and replaced if necessary.
Picker Pivot/Reach
The picker pivot/reach graphical report shows the results for tests of the picker while performing rotation and reach/retract actions.
See
.
Working with Verification Tests 149
Figure 20 Picker Pivot/Reach Graphical Report
•
If the graphical report shows one or more marginal or failed results, inspect the picker. It should rotate easily by hand, and the fingers should spring into a clamped position. Make sure both rotation axis belts are free of debris. Also make sure that the storage is correctly seated in the I/E station and that the I/E station and front door are completely shut.
•
If the problems persist, you may need to replace the picker assembly.
Verification Test Logs
Each verification test produces a test log that details all information and results from the individual tests and sub-tests. In addition, the log includes information to help you understand the test results and to help resolve any problems encountered.
To view a test log:
1.
Click Reports on the Verification Tests dialog box to display the report window.
2.
Select the test to view in the Test Results region of the dialog box. You can view results for the five most recent tests.
3.
Click Reports.
This log file is appended with data as each test finishes. You can repeat the test if any problems are found and fixed. If the Verification Tests dialog box was not closed during the retesting, all results are contained in one log file.
150 Maintaining the library
4.
Click the Text tab.
5.
To save the information that the test generates, click Send.
If you are using the remote LMC client, you can choose to save the log to your hard drive. If you choose to save directly to your hard drive, the report listing and test log are combined into one text file.
A test log provides the following information:
•
The test output is from the library alignment test.
•
The test title is always shown between rows of equal signs.
•
A brief guide for understanding coordinates and offsets used in the test results is provided near the beginning of the log.
•
The X-axis and Y-axis limits applied by this test are shown. MARGINAL output is placed between parentheses, and FAILED output is placed between brackets; for example, (30) and
[45].
•
The results of the sub-test appear between dashed lines.
•
Coordinates are represented as A (aisle), F (frame), R (rack), S (section), C (column), and R
(row).
•
All location values are in 0.1 mm.
•
All results that you should review are identified with four arrows (>>>>) in the column to the left of the detailed results.
•
At the end of every test, summary results of every sub-test are given. The overall test result appears between asterisk lines, and a summary of sub-test results follows.
shows an example of a test log.
Working with Verification Tests 151
Figure 21 Example Test Log Output
To view the graphical reports and text logs:
1.
In the Verification Tests dialog box, click Reports.
The report window appears with the Graphical tab displayed. Use the Graphical tab to view graphical reports and to quickly identify areas where marginal or failed results occurred. Use the toolbar to navigate between graphical reports or to save the results in PDF format.
2.
For more detailed test results, click the Text tab to view the test log generated by the LMC.
Review the text log to find marginal or failed test results, and to see troubleshooting information.
To e-mail the test log or save it as a text file, click Send and then specify the output location.
3.
To see the results for a previous test, click Reports, and then click a test. The LMC saves the most recent five test results.
4.
When you are finished working with the test results, click Close to close the result window. If you are finished running verification tests, click Close to return to the LMC main menu.
152 Maintaining the library
Emailing, Saving, and Printing Test Logs
The Send button on the Text tab on the report window enables you to send a verification test log to e-mail addresses. If you are accessing the LMC from a remote client, Send also enables you to save the log to a file or print it.
NOTE: You can mail, save, or print verification test logs from a remote client. However, you cannot save or print logs from the library OCP.
The information that is sent will be the same as what the Text tab displays at the time that you click
Send.
NOTE: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that the library can send logs to the recipient. See
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47) .
To mail, save, and print test logs:
1.
Make sure that the Text tab on the report window displays the log that you want to send.
2.
Click Send.
The Email, Save or Print Table dialog box appears.
3.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
To indicate that you want to send the log as an e-mail message to a recipient, select
Email, and then either type an e-mail address in the Email field or select an existing address from the drop-down list. Type a comment in the Comment field to send with the log.
•
To indicate that you want to save the log, select Save, and then either type in the Save field a path and a file name to which you want the log saved, or click Browse to specify a location and a file name.
NOTE: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
•
To indicate that you want to send the log to a printer, select Print.
NOTE: The Print option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
4.
To send, click OK.
5.
Click Close to exit the dialog box.
Working with Verification Tests 153
Using the Partitions Defragmentation Tool
Typically, partitions in a library are physically contiguous. That is, all tape slots that belong to a partition are adjacent to one another in the library.
However, if a partition is enlarged, or if an expansion module is added to a library, it is possible that some or all partitions in the library will no longer be physically contiguous. In this case, the slots that belong to a partition are not all adjacent to one other, and the partition is fragmented.
Fragmentation can make bulk loading media more difficult.
Defragmenting partitions reassigns slots in the library so that all slots in each partition are physically contiguous with one another. In addition, media is moved as needed to make sure it resides in the correct partition. In the process, tapes are first moved from their old location to the I/E station, and then are moved to their new location in the library.
NOTE: Only partitions that contain an I/E station can be defragmented. Also, at least one magazine in the I/E station must be empty. Partitions that do not contain an I/E station cannot be defragmented and will be skipped.
Depending on the size of the library, defragmenting partitions can be a time-consuming process.
Defragmenting Partitions
After enlarging a partition or adding an expansion module to the library, check for partition fragmentation, and then defragment partitions if necessary.
To defragment partitions:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
3.
Click Tools
→Partitions Defragmentation.
The Partitions Defragmentation dialog box appears. This dialog box shows a graphical representation of the tape magazines in the library. Magazines are color-coded to indicate which partition they belong to.
If the library has more than one frame, click the >> and << buttons at the bottom of the dialog box to display the next or previous frame. If one or more partitions are fragmented, you can defragment them.
154 Maintaining the library
4.
To begin defragmenting partitions, click Start.
A dialog box appears notifying you that partitions that do not have a free I/E station slot cannot be defragmented and will be skipped.
5.
Verify that the I/E station in each partition has at least one free slot, and then click Yes.
A dialog box appears notifying you that all partitions must be taken offline before defragmenting can begin.
NOTE: If the library is not fragmented, an Attention dialog box displays this information.
Click OK to exit the dialog box.
6.
Click Yes to take all partitions offline.
The partitions defragmentation operation starts. A progress bar at the top of the Partitions
Defragmentation dialog box displays the percentage complete for the operation.
When defragmenting is complete, a dialog box appears prompting you to take all partitions online.
7.
Click Yes to take all partitions online.
8.
Click Close to close the Partitions Defragmentation dialog box.
Using the Partitions Defragmentation Tool 155
Canceling Defragmentation
Depending on the size of the library, defragmenting partitions can be a time-consuming process.
If needed, you can click Close on the Partitions Defragmentation dialog box to cancel the defragmentation operation at any time. When prompted, click Yes to confirm the action.
After you cancel defragmentation, the library finishes moving the current magazine (and any media it contains), then defragmentation stops. If you cancel defragmentation, no tapes will be stranded, and all media will still be assigned to the correct partition. You can resume defragmentation at a later time by clicking Start on the Partitions Defragmentation dialog box.
Recovering After Defragmentation is Interrupted
If a defragmentation operation fails (for example, if a power interruption occurs or the robotics go offline), no tapes will be stranded, and all media will still be assigned to the correct partition.
However, it is possible that some media which was in the process of being moved will remain in the I/E station. In this case, simply import the media into the library. The media will automatically be moved to a magazine in the correct partition. For more information about importing media, see
“Importing Cartridges Into Partitions” (page 164)
.
Cycling Library Power
If library firmware seems to be at fault, or the robot will not move, or a circuit board has gone down, try cycling power to the library. Cycling library power involves shutting down the library, powering it off, and then powering it on. For more information, see
“Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library” (page 95) .
Using Sift Sort
The Sift Sort Export functionality is to facilitate bulk movement of cartridges from their standard slot locations to either a specific storage area within the library or to the I/E station (the default setting will be the left upper storage area within the library). The default mode of operation of the SSE will be to put or relocate cartridges in sort order within the library, based on slot # or other logical grouping. This facilitates quickly locating similar cartridge IDs and easier visualization of daily/weekly/monthly tapes (if a barcode nomenclature is implemented).
•
“Exporting Media via Sift Sort” (page 156)
•
“Capturing Sift Sort Screen Shot” (page 158)
Exporting Media via Sift Sort
To export media using Sift Sort:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Select Tools
→Sift Sort→Export.
The Sift Sort Export dialog box appears.
156 Maintaining the library
3.
To filter by partition, in the SSE Source Filter area, do the following: a.
Select a Partition from the drop down list.
b.
To use an additional filter, in the Media Filter field, type the search string, and click Filter.
For example, to filter all media containing the character 8, type *8*. This field is case sensitive. The appropriate media appears in the Select SSE Media section below.
4.
Optionally, in the Barcode File Selection section, you can filter by using an user-supplied file
(that lists barcodes).
a.
Click Browse to locate the appropriate file.
b.
Click Enable File Filter to instruct the interface to filter out barcodes contained in that file.
If the barcodes in that file do not belong to the particular partition selected, those barcodes are highlighted in red in the Select SSE Media section and are not selectable.
5.
Once you have selected media to sift sort, in the SSE Starting Slot Destination area, click
Explorer to select a coordinate location graphically by clicking on a cell.
6.
To relocate a cartridge to the last empty slot of the destination element selected, ensure that the Relocate Full check box is checked.
Using Sift Sort 157
NOTE: The Relocate Full box is cleared as the default condition.
•
When Relocate Full is checked, any tapes in the destination area will be moved to the lowest available element address location in the partition.
•
When Relocate Full is not cleared, tapes that exist in the destination area will not be moved (skipped).
7.
To clear the criteria selected above, click Reset.
8.
In the Select SSE Media region of the dialog box, clear or select the box or boxes to indicate the cartridges to include in the Sift Sort operation. Use the Select All Media box to clear or select all cartridges listed.
9.
Click OK.
10.
Click Yes in the Warning dialog box to take the partition offline.
The Control Module screen appears.
Based on the selections you made on the Sift Sort Export screen, the Control Module screen displays the available storage locations.
11.
Click the desired storage location slot for the export function.
The coordinates and details for that location appear in the Destination area of the SSE Starting
Slot Destination region of the dialog box.
12.
Click Select.
The Sift Sort Export screen appears.
Capturing Sift Sort Screen Shot
Use the Capture Report screen to capture a picture of the last sift sort export you performed. The picture can be saved to a file on your local work station or e-mailed to a recipient.
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Select Tools
→Sift Sort→Capture Report.
The Capture Sift Sort Screen Shot screen appears.
3.
On the top of the screen, click the circle next to the type of capture you want to perform: BMP,
GIF, PNG, or JPEG.
4.
Click Capture.
The Capture Sift Sort Export screen appears.
5.
To e-mail the capture: a.
Click the radio button to select Email.
b.
Either type the e-mail address into the Email field or select one from the drop-down list.
c.
In the Comment section, include a note to the recipient, or any comments about the capture.
6.
To save the capture, click Save. Then click Browse to locate the location where you want to save the capture on your computer.
7.
Click OK to e-Mail or save the record and exit the dialog box.
8.
Click Close to exit the Capture Sift Sort Screen Shot dialog box.
Retrieving, Emailing, and Saving MIB Files
The Retrieve MIBs option on the Tools menu allows you to retrieve the ESL G3 MIB files, which can be compiled into your SNMP Management tools. After retrieving the MIB files, you can extract the contents for use with a third-party SNMP tool. You can also e-mail or save the MIB file.
To retrieve MIB files:
158 Maintaining the library
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
Select Tools
→Reports→Retrieve MIBs.
The Retrieve MIBs zip file dialog box appears.
3.
To email the MIB file: a.
Click the radio button to select Email.
b.
Either type the e-mail address or select one from the drop-down list.
c.
In the Comment section, type a note to the recipient or any comments about the capture.
4.
To save the MIB File, click the radio button to select Save, then click Browse to navigate to the location where you want to save the MIB file on your computer.
5.
Click OK to send or save the file and exit the dialog box.
Maintaining Air Filters
The access door of each control and expansion module has two air filters: one located at the top, and the other located at the bottom, as shown in
Figure 22 Top and Bottom Air Filters
Many factors exist that contribute to the need to regularly service the air filters. For example, the total number of tape drives and the operating environment greatly affect the rate at which debris accumulates in the air filters.
With the maximum number of tape drives operating in a normal data center environment, check the filters every two years. If you see dust and debris on the inlet side of the filters, remove the filters and use water and a mild soap to clean them. The materials in the filters should last for the life of the product. However, if abnormal contamination occurs, you should replace them. To order filters, contact your service representative.
To remove and replace either a top or bottom air filter:
Maintaining Air Filters 159
1.
Locate the required tools:
•
#1 Phillips screwdriver
•
Air filter
2.
Take the library offline.
For information about taking the library offline, see
“Changing the Library State” (page 87) .
3.
On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to turn off power to the picker and return it to the home position.
The power is on to all other components.
4.
Open the access door.
Aisle power is disabled.
5.
Use the Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two captive thumbscrews. The screws remain attached to the retaining bar.
6.
Remove the air filter.
7.
Use water and a mild soap to clean the air filter.
8.
Allow the air filter to dry.
NOTE: Make sure that the air filter is completely dry before placing it back in the access door.
9.
Place the filter in the opening.
10.
Place the retaining bar over the filter to hold it in place. Use the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two captive thumbscrews.
11.
Close the access door.
12.
On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to enable the picker.
13.
Bring the library online. See
“Changing the Library State” (page 87) .
160 Maintaining the library
6 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes
The Library Management Console (LMC) simplifies cartridge loading and unloading, importing and exporting, and moving and inventory operations. The maximum library configuration can accommodate from 102 to 5322 LTO cartridges for the following drive types:
•
FC LTO-4
•
FC LTO-5
Every partition in the library must contain at least one cleaning cartridge.
Handling Cartridges Properly
To ensure the longest possible life for your cartridges, follow these guidelines:
•
Select a visible location to post procedures that describe proper media handling.
•
Ensure that anyone who handles cartridges has been properly trained in all procedures.
•
Do not drop or strike cartridges. Excessive shock could damage the internal contents of cartridges or the casings themselves, rendering the cartridges unusable.
•
Do not expose cartridges to direct sunlight or sources of heat, including portable heaters and heating ducts.
•
Do not stack cartridges more than five high.
•
The operating temperature range for LTO cartridges is 10° to 35°C. The storage temperature range is 16° to 32°C in a dust-free environment with a relative humidity range between 20% and 80% (non-condensing).
•
If cartridges have been exposed to temperatures outside the ranges specified above, stabilize the cartridges at room temperature for the same amount of time they were exposed to extreme temperatures or for 24 hours, whichever is less.
•
Do not place cartridges near sources of electromagnetic energy or strong magnetic fields, such as computer monitors, electric motors, speakers, or x-ray equipment. Exposure to electromagnetic energy or magnetic fields can destroy data and the embedded servo code written on the media by the cartridge manufacturer, rendering the cartridges unusable.
•
Place identification labels only in the designated slots on the cartridges.
•
If you ship cartridges, ship them in their original packaging or something stronger.
•
Do not insert damaged cartridges into drives.
•
Do not touch the tape or tape leader.
•
Do not degauss cartridges that you intend to reuse.
Removing Lodged Cartridges
It is very unlikely that a cartridge will become lodged in the robot. If this happens, contact technical support. It also is very unlikely that a cartridge will become lodged in a drive. If this happens, remove it.
To remove a lodged cartridge:
1.
On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to turn off power to the picker and return it to the home position.
The power is on to all other components.
2.
Open the access door.
Aisle power is disabled.
Handling Cartridges Properly 161
3.
On the drive, press Eject, and remove the cartridge.
4.
Close the access door.
The power is on to all other components.
5.
On the operator panel, press Robotics Enabled to enable the picker.
Write-Protecting Cartridges
All cartridges have a write-protect (write-inhibit) switch to prevent accidental erasure or overwriting of data. Before loading a cartridge into the library, make sure that the write-protect switch is positioned correctly (either on or off).
For LTO cartridges, slide the red or orange write-protect switch to the right so that the padlock shows in the closed position. The switch is located on the left side of the cartridge front. See
for the location of the switch on the cartridge.
Figure 23 Write-protect Switch on an LTO Cartridge
1. Write-enabled position
3. Write-protect switch
5. Insertion arrow
2. Write-protected position
4. Barcode label
Barcode Requirements
Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine-readable to identify the volume serial number. A barcode must use only uppercase letters A to Z and/or numeric values 0 to 9.
The library supports Code 39 (3 of 9) type barcode labels.
For LTO media barcodes, the library dynamically supports 1 to 14 characters for volume serial number plus a two-character media type identifier. See the image below for an example of an
LTO–5 barcode label.
HP-supplied barcode labels will provide the best results. Barcode labels from other sources can be used, but they must meet the following requirements:
•
ANSI MH10.8M-1983 Standard
•
Number of digits: 6+2
•
Background reflection: greater than 25 percent
•
Print contrast: greater than 75 percent
162 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes
•
Ratio: greater than 2.2
•
Module: >= .254 mm
•
Print tolerance: ± 57 mm
Additional Requirements:
•
Height of the visible portion of the barcode: 10 mm ±2 mm
•
Length of the rest zones: 5.25 mm ± 0.25 mm
•
No black marks should be present in the intermediate spaces or rest zones
•
No white areas should be present on the bars
CAUTION: The misuse of barcode technology can result in backup and restore failures. To ensure that your barcodes meet HP quality standards, always purchase them from an approved supplier and never print barcode labels yourself. For more information, see the order form provided with the library, as well as the Barcode Label Requirements, Compatibility and Usage white paper available from http://www.hp.com/support .
Installing Barcode Labels
Each cartridge in the library must have an external label that is operator and machine readable to identify the barcode number. Most manufacturers offer cartridges with the labels already applied or with the labels included that you can attach.
NOTE: Duplicate barcodes are not supported even if you have mixed media or multiple partitions in the library. If the library has cartridges with identical barcode labels, the library will issue an event notifying you of the issue. Areas in the LMC where media IDs are listed will show information for the first cartridge, but the cartridge with the duplicate barcode label will not be listed.
All barcode labels are applied to the front of a cartridge. Peel off the label and place it on the cartridge. Verify that the label is aligned so that the numbers appear above the barcode, and so that the label is not crooked on the cartridge.
shows an example of barcode label alignment.
CAUTION: Do not place a barcode label on top of a cartridge. Doing so can cause inventory operations to fail.
Figure 24 Applying Barcode Labels to Cartridges
Installing Barcode Labels 163
Using Cleaning Cartridges
Most tape drives require occasional cleaning. A cleaning cartridge cleans accumulated debris from the tape drive and the read/write head.
CAUTION: You must use a separate cleaning cartridge for each partition in the library.
Backup applications or archive software applications use different techniques to automate the process of cleaning drives. These tools specify cleaning cycles based on cycle counts of the drive, drive requests, or regularly scheduled intervals.
The cleaning process itself requires certain considerations:
•
Cleaning tapes must be labeled with a barcode. In some cases, specific labels have been established as industry standard. For instance, the prefix CLN might be used to identify a cleaning tape. The library does not require a specific content to the label and accepts conventional tape labels.
•
Insert a cleaning tape just as you do any other data tape. The most common method is by means of the I/E station using host application control.
•
Cleaning tapes often has limited lives that can last only as long as 20 cycles. The controlling host application manages the number of uses of a cleaning tape. Errors can occur if a tape is inserted into a drive when the tape has already been used the maximum number of times.
•
Export a cleaning tape just as you would export any other data tape.
•
The concepts of physical and partitions must be considered when setting up cleaning procedures and methods. In general, cleaning cartridges must be treated in the same manner as data cartridges. Any physical cartridge (cleaning or data) can exist in only one partition. There can be no sharing of cleaning cartridges between partitions.
Managing Media
The LMC provides you with commands for:
•
Importing and exporting cartridges
•
Moving media from one storage location to another
•
Loading and unloading drives
•
Taking inventory
The following sections provide instructions for performing these tasks.
NOTE: Unless the situation requires it, use the host application to move, load, unload, import, or export cartridges instead of doing so through the LMC. Using the host to move media makes sure that the host view of the library remains in sync with the actual library configuration.
Importing Cartridges Into Partitions
When you first start using your library, open the door and manually insert, directly into storage slots, as many cartridges as you plan to use. The cartridges will not go back all the way if they are inserted incorrectly.
After your library begins operation, use the Import Media dialog box to add cartridges without interrupting library operations. Place cartridges in the I/E station. The scanner automatically reads the barcodes on the new cartridges.
To import cartridges into partitions:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the partition into which you want to import a data cartridge.
From the View menu, click the name of the appropriate partition.
2.
Insert a data cartridge into an appropriate I/E station. You can insert multiple cartridges up to the maximum number of slots in your I/E station.
164 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes
3.
To see which I/E stations are associated with a particular partition, click Monitor
→I/E Station.
4.
Click Operations
→Import or click the Import button on the toolbar.
If the partition is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline.
5.
Click Yes.
The Import Media dialog box displays a list of cartridges in the I/E station.
describes the elements in the Import Media dialog box.
Table 33 Import Media Dialog Box
Element
Barcode
Slot
I/E Station
Magazine
Results
Description
The volume serial number of the cartridge.
The slot number in the I/E station magazine. To understand the location designation, see
Location Coordinates” (page 82) .
The module number.
The magazine number (section) where the slot is located, numbered from the top down.
“Imported” or “Failed”.
6.
Click a cartridge to highlight it, and then click Import.
The picker automatically moves the cartridge from the I/E station to the first available empty slot in that partition. You cannot manually specify the slot.
Exporting Cartridges From Partitions
When partitions are created, specific I/E station slots are associated with that partition. When you export cartridges in a library with partitions, cartridges are exported to the partition I/E station slots. You can only export cartridges if I/E station slots for that partition are empty.
To export cartridges from partitions:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want to export a data cartridge.
From the View menu, click the name of the appropriate partition
2.
Click Operations
→Export or click the Export button on the toolbar.
Managing Media 165
NOTE: The physical library must be online.
If the partition is not offline, you will receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The Export Media dialog box displays a list of cartridges in the partition.
3.
If you want to display one or more media IDs that match a particular pattern, type a media filter in the Media Filter text box, and then click Filter.
Filter performs a search for media IDs that match a particular pattern. For example, the media filter might be set to capture media IDs beginning with the string J00.
4.
Select the corresponding check box in the leftmost column for each cartridge that you want to export.
The maximum number of slots that are available in the I/E station partition appears at the top of the table.
5.
Click OK.
All designated cartridges are exported to the I/E station slots that are associated with the partition. After the operation completes, the library automatically refreshes information in the table.
Loading Drives
The Load Drives dialog box enables you to load drives with cartridges from the current partition.
To load drives:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want to load drives. From the
View menu, click the name of the appropriate partition.
2.
Click Operations
→Drives→Load.
The Load Drives dialog box appears.
3.
If you want to display one or more media IDs that match a particular pattern, type a media filter in the Media ID text box, and then click Filter.
Filter performs a search for media IDs that match a particular pattern. For example, the media filter might be set to capture media IDs beginning with the string J00.
4.
Click the data cartridge to load into the drive to highlight it.
NOTE: You can load only one cartridge at a time.
The parameters used to define a cartridge are media ID (barcode) and location. Location is defined as a series of coordinates representing the aisle, module, rack, section, column, and row where a cartridge is located. See
“Understanding Location Coordinates” (page 82)
.
The Select Media area shows the full slots.
5.
Click the destination drive to receive the media to highlight it. The Select Drive area is populated with empty drives.
You can select only one drive at a time.
6.
To load the data cartridge into the selected drive, click OK.
Unloading Drives
The Unload Drives dialog box enables you to rewind the cartridge in the drive, eject it, and return it to storage.
To unload drives:
166 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the partition from which you want to unload drives. From the
View menu, click the name of the appropriate partition.
2.
Click Operations
→Drives→Unload.
The Unload Drives dialog box appears.
3.
If you want to display media IDs by media type, click the appropriate media type from the
Media Type drop-down list.
4.
Click the drive you want to unload to highlight it. You can only unload one drive at a time.
The parameters used to define a cartridge are media ID (volume serial number) and location.
Location is defined as a series of coordinates representing the aisle, module, rack, section, column, and row where a cartridge is located. See
“Understanding Location Coordinates”
.
5.
Click OK.
The library rewinds the data cartridge, unloads it from the drive, and returns it to storage.
Moving Media
The Move Media dialog box enables you to move media from one location to another within a partition.
NOTE: Only one cartridge can be moved at a time.
To move media:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the partition within which you want to move media. From the
View menu, click the name of the appropriate partition.
2.
Click Operations
→Move Media.
The Move Media dialog box appears.
The table in the Select Source area lists slot locations with cartridges, and the table in the
Select Target area lists slot locations without cartridges.
You can limit the cartridges that are listed in the Select Source table in the following ways:
•
To list cartridges by location, click the arrows next to the location coordinate boxes at the top of the Select Source area, click the appropriate numbers or All, and then click
Show. For information about location coordinates, see
•
To list a particular cartridge by media ID, type the volume serial number of the cartridge in the Media ID text box, and then click Show. You also can type a partial volume serial number, such as K00, to list all cartridges within the specified location coordinates that have a volume serial number containing the specified string of characters.
•
You also can limit the slot locations that are listed in the Select Target table by device type. From the Device Type drop-down list, click I/E Station, Storage, or Drive.
3.
In the Select Source table, click the media ID for the cartridge that you want to move to highlight it. If necessary, you can use the scroll bar to display additional media IDs for cartridges that are in drives or I/E stations.
4.
In the Select Target table, click the destination for the cartridge that you want to move to highlight it. If necessary, you can use the scroll bar to display additional slot locations.
5.
Click OK.
The media moves to the new location.
Inventory
The Inventory command causes the library to scan all storage locations, drives, and I/E stations.
The library automatically performs an inventory when doors are closed or the library's configuration
Managing Media 167
information is changed in any way. You can configure inventories to automatically occur whenever the power is cycled, or you can initiate an inventory immediately by clicking Operations
→Inventory.
To perform an inventory:
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
You can perform this procedure while either viewing the physical library or a partition. From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
3.
Click Operations
→Inventory.
NOTE: If you want to perform an inventory of the physical library, and it is not offline, you will receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
If you want to perform an inventory of a partition, and if the physical library is offline, you will receive a message that asks you whether you want to take the physical library online.
Click Yes. Also, if the partition is online, you will receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The Inventory dialog box appears.
This dialog box shows the total number of slots and the number of occupied slots in the physical library or the partition, depending on the view you chose.
4.
To perform an inventory, click OK.
The inventory process take a few minutes to complete.
5.
When the Inventory completed successfully message appears, click OK.
168 Working with Cartridges and Barcodes
7 Managing library firmware and software versions
Updating Library Software
To download library software to the library and perform various update operations, you can use the Update Software option to access the Update Firmware Wizard.
NOTE: This process may take 30 to 45 minutes.
Library software update files contain updates for one or more of the following library components:
•
Management control blade (MCB)
•
Robotics control unit (RCU)
•
Control management blade (CMB)
•
Ethernet Control blade (EEB)
•
Power and control subsystem for blades
•
Drive sleds
•
Individual drive firmware image files contain updates for specific types of drives.
Before you can update the library with a library software update file, you must use the Update
Firmware Wizard to download the file to the MCB. You can use the wizard to perform the following operations:
•
Install new library software (including downloading and installing software).
•
Reinstall the currently installed library software package.
•
Roll back library software to a previously installed package.
You can perform all update operations while viewing the physical library. However, if you are viewing a partition, the only operations that are available to you are for updating drive firmware
(by using either firmware images or update tapes) for drives within the partition.
You can perform update operations from either the library OCP or a remote client on a remote host computer, with one exception. You cannot download images form the local OCP.
During the software update process, the MCB distributes the various parts of the software package to the proper library components. The MCB also keeps track of the software components it updates so that you can roll those components back to a previous version.
After the library finishes installing new library software or rolling back library software to a previously installed level, the library automatically restarts. Any necessary autoleveling of library components begins after the library powers up and discovers library components.
CAUTION: As a result of restore, rescue, or revert operations, the library shuts down. You must have physical access to the library to bring the library back up. If you are performing a restore, rescue, or revert operation using remote access, the library will remain shut down until the library is directly powered back on.
If you choose to reinstall the currently installed software package, the robotics control unit (RCU), picker, and drive sleds are updated. Therefore, the library does not restart after the reinstallation process completes. The reinstallation procedure should be run only under specific circumstances.
For more information, see
“Rolling Back to the Previous Build Package” (page 173) .
NOTE: Rollback and reinstallation of current package options are viable recovery steps during a failed firmware upgrade. However, these features should not be used as troubleshooting tools.
Updating Library Software 169
Accessing the Update Firmware Wizard
The Update Firmware Wizard gives you access to all of the library software update operations.
NOTE: Before performing a software upgrade, we recommend that you shut down and restart the library.
To access the Update Firmware Wizard:
1.
Log on as admin or service.
2.
You can access the Update Firmware Wizard while viewing either the physical library or a partition. From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
3.
Click Tools
→Update Firmware→Library.
The Update Firmware Wizard dialog box appears.
This dialog box explains the operations you can perform by using the Update Firmware
Wizard.
4.
If you are ready to proceed, click Next. If you are not ready to proceed, click Cancel.
The Select Library Software Package for Installation dialog box appears.
170 Managing library firmware and software versions
The remaining procedures in this section start with the Library System Software Update dialog box.
Installing New Library Software
To update your library software, you must download a new library software package to the library management control blade (MCB) from the remote client file system, and then install the downloaded software. You can perform the library software update from either the library OCP or a remote client, but you must perform the software download to the MCB from a remote client.
NOTE: Some upgrades will not be download upgrades but instead CF (compact flash) swap upgrades.
NOTE: If you are accessing the LMC using the remote client application, be aware that after you update the library software and after the library restarts, you will not be able to view the LMC from the remote client application. You must update the client software to match the version of software you installed on the library.
Downloading a New Library Software Package
Before you install a new library software package, you must download the package to the library
MCB from the remote client file system. You must perform the download from a remote client.
NOTE: Before you begin the following procedure, make sure that you have obtained the new library software package from HP and placed it in an accessible location on your laptop.
To download a new library software package:
1.
On the Library System Software Update dialog box, click Download New Package.
The Software Update dialog box appears.
2.
Navigate to the location of the software file (with a .frm extension) you want to download, click the file to highlight it, and then click Open.
The Operation in Progress screen displays the progress of the download.
The download process copies the software file from the remote file system to the library MCB.
When the download process completes, the Library System Software Update dialog box appears again with the Install downloaded package option automatically selected.
The version number of the software package appears at the end of the Install downloaded package option.
Installing a New Library Software Package
After you download the new library software package, you are ready to install it from either the library OCP or a remote client. This procedure assumes that you are working from a remote client.
To install a new library software package:
1.
On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select Install downloaded package.
NOTE: If you downloaded a software package and then began this procedure without closing the Update Firmware Wizard - Library System Software Update dialog box, Install downloaded package is already selected.
2.
Click Next.
The estimated time for the installation is displayed.
3.
Click Install.
A warning message appears asking you to take the library offline.
4.
Click Yes.
Updating Library Software 171
NOTE: The library automatically logs off other users so that they cannot perform library operations while the library software update operation is in progress.
The Update Software Summary window asks if you want to continue.
5.
Click Yes.
The Software Update Progress screen displays the progress of the installation.
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary in the Description and Status columns.
NOTE: During the update, the Abort button appears dimmed and is unavailable. Do not interrupt the update process before it is completed. Interrupting the update process might cause the library to become unusable until its software is restored.
After 100% success has been achieved for all components, the library is shutdown. This process could take several minutes.
6.
After the update is complete, the Software Update Progress screen appears. Click OK.
The Attention message informs you that the software update was successful, the library will be rebooting, and that you have been automatically logged off from the system.
NOTE: If the software update was not successful, an event is generated. Resolve all events and begin the software update process again.
7.
Click OK.
The message Library is being shutdown... appears.
This action may take a few minutes.
The Operation in Progress screen appears.
8.
Log off the remote browser and log in again after the library has completed its reboot process.
9.
Click Help
→About. Validate that the components reflect the correct firmware version.
Reinstalling Current Library Software
The reinstall feature enables you to re-establish the installation of the library software that is currently active on the MCB to the various remote devices, such as the RCU and the CMB. Perform this procedure if either of the following situations has occurred:
•
The compact flash on the MCB has been replaced, the library software on it is now at a different level, and you want to invoke the level that is on the MCB compact flash.
•
The RCU has been replaced and you want to bring it to the level that is on the MCB.
To reinstall current library software:
1.
On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select Reinstall current package.
2.
Click Next.
The Update Firmware Wizard dialog box appears.
3.
Click Install.
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The library automatically logs off other users so that they cannot perform library operations while the library software update operation is in progress.
The Software Update Progress dialog box appears.
172 Managing library firmware and software versions
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary in the Description and Status columns.
CAUTION: During the update, the Abort button appears dimmed and is unavailable. Do not interrupt the update process before it is completed. Interrupting the update process might cause the library to become unusable until its software is restored.
NOTE: The components that already have the correct version loaded will quickly transition to a Success status during the reinstall process.
4.
After the update process completes, click OK.
Within approximately a minute after completing the update process, the RCU restarts.
CAUTION: Do not perform any library operations until the RCU is completely restarted.
NOTE: Before the RCU is restarted, the main menu Activity panel displays the message,
WARNING: The Robotics is not Enabled
. This message indicates that the RCU is not yet ready. When the RCU is ready, the message disappears.
5.
Bring the physical library online.
a.
From the LMC, click Operations
→Change Mode.
b.
Select Online, and then click OK.
6.
Click Help
→About. Validate that the components reflect the correct firmware version.
Rolling Back to the Previous Build Package
To roll back to the previous build package:
1.
On the Library System Software Update dialog box, select Rollback to package.
2.
Click Next.
The Update Firmware Wizard dialog box appears.
3.
Click Install.
NOTE: If the physical library is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline. Click Yes.
The library automatically logs off other users so that they cannot perform library operations while the library software update operation is in progress.
The Software Update Progress dialog box appears.
Real-time progress information appears under Progress Summary in the Description and Status columns.
CAUTION: During the update, the Abort button appears dimmed and is unavailable. Do not interrupt the update process before it is completed. Interrupting the update process might cause the library to become unusable until its software is restored.
4.
After the update process completes, click OK.
Within approximately a minute after completing the update process, the RCU restarts.
CAUTION: Do not perform any library operations until the RCU is completely restarted.
5.
Bring the physical library online.
Updating Library Software 173
a.
From the LMC, click Operations
→Change Mode.
b.
Select Online, and then click OK.
6.
Click Help
→About. Validate that the components reflect the correct firmware version.
Updating Drive Firmware
IMPORTANT: You can perform drive firmware updates from either the library OCP or a remote client, but you must perform drive firmware downloads from a remote client.
It is important to make sure that the library is running the appropriate level of drive firmware, compatible with the drive type. To determine the appropriate drive firmware, see the library Release
Notes or contact HP technical support. If you want to update drive firmware by using Ethernet
Expansion Blades (EEB), perform the procedure in this section. Drives that are not attached to
Ethernet Expansion Blades must be updated by using update tapes.
NOTE: If you are viewing a partition, you can only set up update drive firmware for drives within the partition.
You can use the Update Drive Firmware command from the Tools menu to update drive brick firmware on one or more drives by using either update tapes or drive firmware images that you have downloaded to the library.
Accessing the Update Drive Firmware Dialog Box
NOTE: Before performing a firmware upgrade, we recommend that you shut down and restart the library.
To access the Update Drive Firmware dialog box:
1.
Log on as admin or service.
2.
You can access the Update Drive Firmware dialog box while viewing either the physical library or a partition. From the View menu, click the name of the physical library or the appropriate partition.
CAUTION: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update operations affect drives that are within the partition only.
3.
Click Tools
→Update Firmware→Drives.
If the physical library or the partition you are viewing is not offline, you receive a message that asks you whether you want to take it offline.
4.
Click Yes.
The Update Drive Firmware dialog box appears.
174 Managing library firmware and software versions
From the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, you can update drive firmware by using either update tapes or drive firmware images that you have downloaded to the library. The table lists all drives in the library or, if you are currently viewing a partition, all drives in the partition.
The Manage Images button enables you to download new drive firmware images to the library or delete drive firmware images that the library currently stores. Drive images that are currently stored on the library are listed in the drop-down list in the Select Firmware File area.
To update drive firmware by using downloaded firmware images, proceed to
Firmware Using Firmware Images” (page 176)
.
To update drive firmware by using update tapes, proceed to
“Updating Drive Firmware Using
.
Downloading New Drive Firmware
IMPORTANT: You can perform drive firmware updates from either the library OCP or a remote client, but you must perform drive firmware downloads from a remote client.
To download new drive firmware:
1.
Download the new drive firmware image to the library MCB from the remote client file system and place it in an accessible location on your laptop.
2.
On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, click Manage Images.
The Manage Drive Firmware Images dialog box appears.
Updating Drive Firmware 175
The library has enough space for 20 MB (with a maximum of 8 images) of drive firmware images. If the check box for a drive firmware image is clear, you can delete the image by clicking it to highlight it, and then clicking Delete.
3.
To download a new drive firmware image, click Download.
The Select firmware image file to download dialog box appears.
4.
Navigate to the location of the drive firmware image file (with a .frm extension) you want to download, and then click the image file to highlight it.
5.
Click Open.
The download process copies the drive firmware image from the remote file system to the
MCB. After the download process finishes, the drive firmware image file is added to the list on the Manage Drive Firmware Images dialog box.
6.
On the Manage Drive Firmware Images dialog box, click Close.
The Update Drive Firmware dialog box appears again.
Updating Drive Firmware Using Firmware Images
CAUTION: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update operations affect drives that are within the partition only.
CAUTION: Before you update drive firmware during this procedure, make sure that tapes are not mounted in any of the drives. If tapes are mounted in drives during the update process, the library loses knowledge of the cartridge home cell in storage, resulting in library and host inventory issues.
If you load a firmware image onto a drive that is the same version that is currently running on the drive, the upgrade will fail.
If host reservations exist on drives, remove them prior to initiating drive code changes.
To update drive firmware using firmware images:
1.
On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, select Firmware Image.
176 Managing library firmware and software versions
2.
In the left-most column of the table under the Update Method area, select one or more check boxes that correspond to drives that you want to update with the same drive firmware image.
Use the following rules to select drives:
•
Do not select drives that are currently loaded.
•
If you select more than one drive, make sure that they are all of the same drive type.
•
Click Select All to select all drives. (All drives must be of the same drive type.)
3.
From the drop-down list in the Select Firmware File area, click the drive firmware image you want to use to update the drives you selected.
CAUTION: The drop-down list includes all drive firmware images that are currently stored on the library, regardless of drive type. Be careful to select a drive firmware image that is compatible with the type of drive that you want to update. See the current library release notes for compatibility information or contact HP technical support at http://www.hp.com/support .
4.
Click Start.
NOTE: The library automatically logs off other users so that they cannot perform library operations while the drive firmware update operation is in progress.
The library updates the firmware on each selected drive.
Updating Drive Firmware Using Update Tapes
It is important to verify that the library firmware version is compatible with the new drive firmware version. To determine the appropriate drive firmware, see the library Release Notes or contact HP technical support. If you need to update drive firmware by using update tapes, perform the following procedure.
CAUTION: The drive firmware image must be compatible with the drives that you will update.
For more information, see the HP Business Support Center at http://www.hp.com/support .
NOTE: If you are viewing a partition, drive firmware update operations affect drives that are within the partition only, and uses the I/E slots within the partition. If you are viewing the physical library, drive firmware update operations affect all drives.
To update drive firmware using update tapes:
1.
Write down the Barcode number on the tape before inserting it into the I/E Station.
2.
From the Physical Library view, insert the firmware tape(s) into any I/E station slots in the library.
3.
On the Update Drive Firmware dialog box, select FMR Tape.
The Select Firmware Tapes dialog box appears.
4.
Select the tape cartridges you want to use for the firmware update by checking the check boxes in the media table, and click OK.
Updating Drive Firmware 177
NOTE: You can perform a firmware update only for drives of the same type (such as LTO-4 or LTO-5).
5.
Click Start.
A message, Updating do not power cycle the drive, is displayed above the drive table in red.
CAUTION: Do not power cycle the drive.
The Status column in the drive table displays the status of the update.
178 Managing library firmware and software versions
8 Troubleshooting your Library
This chapter describes how the library informs you of issues that it detects within its subsystems. It also provides information about working with events to resolve issues, running verifications tests to check whether the issues have been resolved, interpreting LEDs, and accessing Online Help.
Is the access door closed?
Library operations are taken offline when the access door is opened. If library operations have stopped, check whether the access door is shut and the Robotics Enabled indicator is solid green.
Is a cartridge or drive having problems?
If you experience problems reading, writing, or otherwise using a cartridge, try the following:
•
Use the Monitor
→Media command to determine the number of mounts for the cartridge, then compare that number to other cartridges in the system. If the cartridge has been used excessively, replace it with a new cartridge.
•
Ask an administrator to put the cartridge in a different drive, then use the Tools
→Drives command to check the error count. If the error count continues to increase, replace the old cartridge with a new cartridge.
•
Use TapeAssure in Command View TL, version 2.8 or later, to pinpoint the problem. (Command
View TL requires a per-library license.) TapeAssure provides information about cartridges and drives, including quality, performance, life, and configuration. HP's TapeAssure Analysis
Template can also be used to graph and analyze a variety of statistics over time.
For more information about TapeAssure, refer to HP StorageWorks Interface Manager and
Command View for Tape Libraries Version User Guide at www.hp.com/support/cvtl .
How Does the Library Report Issues?
The library has advanced problem detection, reporting, and notification functionality. The library has many processors and sensors that monitor conditions and operations, such as temperatures, voltages, current, calibrations, and firmware versions.
The first indication of issues is the status indicator on the indicator panel, as shown in
.
Figure 25 Status Indicator
1. Status indicator
•
If the Status indicator light is solid green, the library currently has no events in an Open state.
•
If the Status indicator light is flashing amber, at least one of the six subsystems has an event in an Open state.
Is the access door closed?
179
When the library detects an issue, it creates an event for it. A event includes the following types of information:
•
Details about the issue.
•
Reports that are associated with the event.
•
A repair page that provides corrective actions.
In most cases, events isolate field replaceable units (FRUs) that you must service or replace.
NOTE: Events can indicate failures or other serious problems, but they also can indicate warning conditions that you should investigate or other helpful information. For example, opening the library access door or changing the library configuration causes the library to create an event, but these situations would not indicate serious problems. However, you should investigate the events.
The library assigns a severity level to each event that it creates and notifies users of the event.
describes possible severity levels for events.
Table 34 Severity Levels Assigned to Events
Severity Level
1 (Failed)
Description
Indicates that a failure has occurred or a different serious condition exists within a library subsystem that requires immediate corrective action. In most cases, a hardware component is no longer functioning at an acceptable level or has failed. Typical library operations are either impossible or highly unreliable.
Examples of failure situations include a FRU that is not functioning, a temperature threshold that has been reached that causes unreliable operations, or a partition that the library has automatically taken offline.
2 (Degraded)
3 (Warning)
Indicates that a degraded condition exists within a library subsystem that impacts system performance or redundancy.
Typical library operations can continue without immediate corrective action, but an administrator should investigate the condition and correct the problem soon.
An example of a degraded situation is a redundant power supply that has failed.
Indicates that a condition exists within a library subsystem that has little effect on system operations. Typical library operations can continue without immediate corrective action, but you should investigate the condition and correct the problem when possible. Warnings also can provide helpful information, such as indicating that a door is open.
Examples of warning situations include a FRU that is functioning less reliably or a temperature threshold that has been reached that does not affect reliable operations.
The library has two ways of notifying users that it has discovered issues and has created events for them:
•
Status indicators on Library Management Console (LMC) system status buttons.
•
E-mail notifications.
Understanding Indicators on System Status Buttons
System status buttons are located in the Overall System Status area at the bottom of the LMC display. Each button displays a status indicator for the library subsystem it represents. For more information about the buttons, see
“System Status Buttons” (page 80)
. When the library creates
180 Troubleshooting your Library
an event, the status indicator button for the affected subsystem automatically changes from the following icon:
Good (green) to one of the following icons:
Warning or Degraded (yellow)
Failed (flashing red)
The meanings of these status indicators correspond to the severity levels described in
. If a system status button indicates anything other than a Good state, clicking it displays a list of open events for the subsystem. To access events by using the system status buttons, see
.
Understanding E-mail Notifications
The library collects status information on its components and, if the appropriate e-mail notifications have been set up in the LMC, the library can send notifications whenever events with severity levels
1, 2, or 3 are created. For information about severity levels, see
.
The library assigns a severity level to each event it creates. If the event severity level matches one of an e-mail address severity codes (as set up in e-mail notifications), the library sends a notification to that particular e-mail address. The library also sends a notification if an event's severity level escalates to a more severe level. The library does not send one when an event severity level becomes less severe.
To set up e-mail addresses to receive notifications, see
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47)
and
Up E-mail Notifications” (page 48)
.
The subject line of the e-mail notification indicates ESLG3, the library serial number, and the severity level of the event. The body of the message states that the library sent the message automatically.
The message body also includes the following information, which provides details about the event and library conditions at the time of the event:
•
Event summary
•
Event details, including status information
•
Firmware versions, including MCB, RCU, CMB, and drive
•
Physical library configuration
•
Library states, such as physical library online or offline, partitions online or offline, or robotics enabled or disabled
•
Time stamps of recent activity
•
Report summary
•
Report details for the event
The notification also includes a repair page attachment. This page provides a problem description and corrective actions you or a customer service engineer (CSE) can perform. For more information about repair pages, see
“Viewing Repair Pages” (page 192)
.
How Does the Library Report Issues?
181
NOTE: A notification e-mail contains helpful information about an event and how to resolve it.
However, the notification represents a condition that existed at a certain time in the past. The notification might not reflect the current situation. The notification indicates a specific event ID, so you should find and examine that specific event in the LMC. The event reflects the real-time status of the issue. For more information about accessing events, see
.
Working with Events
Events are your primary troubleshooting tool when you experience problems with the library. A event provides details and reports about the issue and library conditions at the time of the event.
It also provides guidance on how to resolve the issue. If you are an administrator or a service representative, you can access the events through the LMC. This section explains how to display event lists, view event and report details, view repair pages, and resolve and close events.
Event Guidelines
To help you quickly troubleshoot an issue by using events, read the following guidelines.
What is the issue and its cause?
You became aware of a library issue because either the library sent an e-mail notification; an LMC system status button indicated a subsystem status of Warning, Degraded, or Failed; or a backup/archive software application indicated a problem.
Events include details about the issue and library conditions at the time of the event. They also include reports, any history events that the library has created in the past for the same FRU, and a repair page that provides a detailed description of the issue and its possible causes. The repair page also provides corrective actions that you or a CSE can perform.
To use an event to determine an issue and its cause, you can perform the following general steps:
1.
Display a list of events. See
“Displaying Event Lists” (page 184)
.
2.
View the details for the appropriate event. See
“Viewing Event Details” (page 186) .
3.
View the reports that are associated with this event. See
“Viewing Event Details Reports” (page
.
4.
View the event repair page. See
“Viewing Repair Pages” (page 192)
.
Where did the issue occur in the library?
The Status Group field on the Details tab of the Event Details dialog box indicates the library subsystem that caused the event. For more information about the Details tab, see
The FRU ID field on the Report tab of the Event Details dialog box indicates the type of FRU that is affected. The FRU Instance field indicates the specific FRU by its location in the library. For more information about the Report tab, see
“Viewing Event Details Reports” (page 190) .
When did the issue first occur?
The Posted field on the Details tab of the Event Details dialog box indicates the date and time on which the library first reported the issue and created an event for it. For more information about the Details tab, see
“Viewing Event Details” (page 186)
.
Has the issue occurred repeatedly?
The Duplicates field on the Details tab of the Event Details dialog box indicates how many times the library has reported the same issue while the event has been open.
In addition, you can determine whether the same issue has occurred and been resolved in the past. The FRU History List area on the Details tab lists events that have been opened for the same
FRU in the past, but have been resolved and are now in the Closed or Verified state. By selecting a history event and then clicking Show, you can investigate the event history of a particular FRU.
For more information about the Details tab and viewing history events, see
.
182 Troubleshooting your Library
Has the FRU been replaced before?
You can determine whether a specific FRU has been replaced in the past by examining the FRU
SN field on the Details tab of the Event Details dialog box for the open event and the history events.
Because the history events associated with an open event are for the same specific instance of a
FRU, and because a FRU instance is identified by its location in the library, the FRU serial number, which is uniquely assigned to each FRU, will change if the unit has been replaced in the past. For more information about the Details tab and viewing history events, see
.
How do I resolve the issue?
The repair page provides comprehensive procedures for resolving the issue. Both user and CSE procedures are provided. When the procedures require a CSE to perform them, contact technical support. For more information, see
“Viewing Repair Pages” (page 192)
.
How can I know whether the issue is resolved?
Some issues require you to determine whether they are resolved and others the library will detect automatically.
•
In some cases, the library can automatically detect that an issue is resolved (for example, an open door that is now shut). For these, the library automatically transitions the event to the
Verified state.
•
In other cases, the library cannot automatically detect that an issue is resolved (for example, a faulty tape cartridge). You must determine whether the issue is resolved by running a verification test or, if an applicable test does not exist, by following the repair page instructions.
If you run a test and the results are all good, the library automatically transitions the event to the Verified state.
If you cannot run a test, you should physically examine the FRU, and then manually transition the event to the Closed state after determining that the issue is resolved. After you close the event, the library transitions it to the Verified state if it is able to do so. For more information, see
“Running Verification Tests to Determine Issue Resolution” (page 195)
and
.
The library reopens events that receive failed, degraded, or warning reports within 30 minutes of transitioning to the Closed or Verified state. If a Closed or Verified event remains free of failed, degraded, or warning reports for 30 minutes, the library locks them from transitioning back to the Open state. A failed, degraded, or warning report that is received beyond 30 minutes causes the library to open a new event.
What do I do if I cannot resolve the issue?
Contact technical support. See
Contacting HP . Technical support personnel might ask you to send
them an electronic copy of the event.
How do I view the number of events that occurred in a certain time range?
The Events Report lets you see how many events occurred in a particular time period. You can choose to group events by subsystem, module, or FRU. The results can be presented as a summary or as a trend, so you can see if the number of issues is increasing or decreasing over time. Also, the report results can be presented in different chart formats, such as bar graphs or pie charts. For more information, see
“Generating the Events Report” (page 197) .
Working with Events 183
Displaying Event Lists
The LMC provides three ways to display event lists:
•
By clicking a system status button that indicates a Warning, Degraded, or Failed state.
This option displays a list of open events for the associated subsystem. See
Status Buttons to Display Event Lists” (page 184)
.
•
By clicking Tools
→Event Viewer.
This option displays the Events dialog box, from which you can obtain a list of all events or a partial list of events according to selection criteria. See
“Using the Events Command or the
Events Button to Display Event Lists” (page 185) .
•
By clicking the Events button on the toolbar.
This option displays the same Events dialog box as the Tools
→Event Viewer command does.
See
“Using the Events Command or the Events Button to Display Event Lists” (page 185) .
From the event list, you can select an event to view event details, associated reports, and a repair page.
Using System Status Buttons to Display Event Lists
To display a list of events by using a system status button, the button must indicate a Warning,
Degraded, or Failed state. Clicking a system status button that indicates a Good state either displays a list of subsystem events that are in Closed or Verified states or informs you that no events exist for the subsystem.
To use system status buttons to display event lists:
1.
Click the system status button that corresponds with the subsystem for which you want to display a list of open events.
The Event List dialog box appears with a list of open events for the subsystem.
describes the elements on the Event List dialog box:
Table 35 Event List Dialog Box
Description Element
In the Select Event area:
Check Box
ID
To close multiple events, select each event you want to close by clicking the check box.
The library-assigned identifier for the event.
184 Troubleshooting your Library
Table 35 Event List Dialog Box (continued)
Description
State
Severity
Serial #
Sub-system
Posted Date
A summary description of the event. The description identifies the FRU that caused the event and includes reason text that describes the cause of the event.
The current state of the event. Possible states are:
• Open — indicates that an issue, whether problem or warning condition, has occurred in the library that requires attention
• Closed — indicates that a user has closed the issue
• Verified — indicates that the library has successful operational results or positive data that verifies that the problem is resolved
The severity level of the event. Possible levels are:
• 1 (Failed)
• 2 (Degraded)
• 3 (Warning)
• 5 (Good)
The serial number that the manufacturer assigns to the particular FRU.
The subsystem that caused the event. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Cooling
• Robotics
The date and time on which the library created the event.
The Details button displays the Event Details dialog box. For more information, see
2.
By default, the event list is sorted by event ID in ascending order, with the oldest event at the top and the newest one at the bottom.
To change the sorting (for example, by state or severity), click the column heading by which you want the events sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
Using the Events Command or the Events Button to Display Event Lists
To display event lists with the Events command or button:
1.
Make sure that you are viewing the physical library. From the View menu or in the Managed
Views region of the LMC, click the name of the physical library.
2.
Click Tools
→Event Viewer, or click the Events button on the toolbar.
The Events dialog box appears.
Working with Events 185
This dialog box enables you to specify the kinds of events that will appear in the event list.
For example, you can do the following:
•
To display all events in the library, select All for state, severity, and subsystem.
•
To display all open events with a severity level 2 status for the drives and control subsystems, select Opened for state, 2 for severity, and Drives and Control for subsystem.
•
To display all events that users have manually closed for the robotics subsystem, select
Closed for state, All for severity, and Robotics for subsystem.
•
To display all events that the library has automatically determined as having been resolved, select Verified for state, All for severity, and All for subsystem.
If you select a combination that does not produce an event list, a No Events Found message appears.
By default, this dialog box is set to Opened for state, All for severity level, and All for subsystems.
NOTE: Events that the library has automatically verified and closed are in the Verified state.
Events that users have manually closed are in the Closed state.
3.
Select the appropriate check boxes in the Select State, Select Severity, and Select Sub-system areas, and then click OK.
For descriptions of elements on the Event List dialog box, see
“Using System Status Buttons to
Display Event Lists” (page 184) .
4.
By default, the event list is sorted by event ID in ascending order with the oldest event at the top and the newest one at the bottom. To change the sorting (for example, by state or severity), click the column heading by which you want the events sorted. Repeatedly clicking a column heading toggles between ascending and descending order.
Viewing Event Details
Events provide detailed information about the event itself, the reports that are associated with it, and a repair page that gives guidance for resolving the issue. These events provide important information about library conditions from which the issue emerged and helpful information for resolving it.
To display the detailed information for a particular event, perform the following steps:
1.
On the Event List dialog box in the Select Event area, click the appropriate event row to highlight it.
2.
Click Details.
The Event Details dialog box appears with the Details tab displayed.
186 Troubleshooting your Library
The Event # area of the Event Details dialog box displays detailed information about the event.
The FRU History Event List area lists all events that were ever opened in the past and that see the same specific FRU (based on the location of the FRU in the library) as the one reported by this event.
describes the elements on the Details tab.
Table 36 Event Details Dialog Box, Details Tab
Description Element
In the Event # area:
State
Posted
Status Group
The current state of the event. Possible states are:
• Open — indicates that an issue, whether problem or warning condition, has occurred in the library that requires attention.
• Closed — indicates that a user has closed the issue.
• Verified — indicates that the library has successful operational results or positive data that verifies that the problem is resolved.
The date and time on which the library created the report.
The subsystem that caused the event. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
Viewing Event Details 187
Table 36 Event Details Dialog Box, Details Tab (continued)
Element
Closed
Severity
Duplicates
FRU SN
Repair Link
FRU Status
Description
• Cooling
• Robotics
If the event is closed, the date and time on which it was closed.
The severity level that is associated with the status group
(subsystem). Possible levels are:
• 1 (Failed)
• 2 (Degraded)
• 3 (Warning)
• 5 (Good)
The number of times that the library has reopened the event. If an event is in the Closed or Verified state and the identical problem occurs again within 30 minutes, the library reopens the event and increments the event's duplicate count. If the library has not reopened the event, the value is zero (0).
Events that are in the Closed or Verified state for more than 30 minutes cannot be reopened. In this case, if the identical problem occurs again, the library creates a new event.
The serial number of the particular FRU.
The name of the repair page that is associated with the report.
The status of the FRU. Possible statuses are:
• Failed
• Degraded
• Warning
• Good
Error Code
FRU Logical SN
Description area
A number that is associated with a particular issue that caused the event report. Because more than one issue can cause a report, an error code provides another level of detail to what the report provides. The error code maps to a portion of library firmware code, which a trained analyst can examine to determine the root cause of an issue. If the event is in the Closed or Verified state, this field is set to N/A. This information is for technical support use only.
The logical serial number that the library assigns to a drive in a specific location. This is not the serial number of the particular FRU (see FRU SN in this table). If a drive is replaced by another drive in the same library location, the logical serial number remains the same. From the host's perspective, the replacement drive is the same as the original one. This field appears for all drive-related events only. If the logical serial number addressing feature is disabled for the library, Disabled appears in this field.
A summary description of report information that is associated with the event. It includes reason text that describes the cause of the event.
In the FRU History Event List area:
188 Troubleshooting your Library
Table 36 Event Details Dialog Box, Details Tab (continued)
Element
ID
Description
State
Severity
Serial #
Sub-system
Posted Date
Description
The library-assigned identifier for the report.
A summary description of the history event. The description identifies the FRU that caused the event and includes reason text that describes the cause of the event.
All events that appear on the Details tab, including the ones in the FRU History Event List area and the Event # area, see the same specific FRU.
The current state of the history event. All history events are in the Closed or Verified state.
The historical event's current severity level.
The serial number of the particular FRU.
The subsystem that caused the event. Possible subsystems are:
• Connectivity
• Drives
• Control
• Power
• Cooling
• Robotics
The date and time on which the library created the event.
From the Event Details, you can perform the following tasks:
•
Display detailed information for a history event by using the Show button, then re-display the original event details using the Initial Event button (see
“Viewing History Event Details”
).
•
Connect to online service and support resources by clicking Online Support. Online service and support resources include free, secure access to KnowledgeBase articles and the Online
Service Request tool. (If clicking Online Support does not connect you to the online service and support web site, try disabling your web browser pop-up blocker.)
•
Mail, save, or print event information by using the Send button.
•
Determine whether the issue is resolved by using the FRU Test button. FRU Test is available only if the FRU related to the event has an applicable verification test that you can run. (FRUs that belong to the Accessor, Picker, Drive, I/E Assembly, or Bar Code Label categories have applicable verification tests.) When you click FRU Test, the Verification Tests dialog box appears with the appropriate verification test already selected and ready to start. If you run a verification test and the results are all good, the library automatically transitions the event to the Verified state.
NOTE: If the library does not have a verification test for the FRU, after you resolve the issue, you must manually transition the event to the Closed state by using the Close Event button.
After you close the event, the library transitions it to the Verified state if it is able to do so.
•
Display report information (see
“Viewing Event Details Reports” (page 190)
).
•
Display the repair page (see
“Viewing Repair Pages” (page 192)
).
Viewing Event Details 189
Viewing History Event Details
To display the detailed information for a particular history event, perform the following steps:
1.
On the Event List dialog box in the FRU History Event List area of the Details tab, click the appropriate event row to highlight it.
2.
Click Show.
The history event details appear in the Event # area. However, the list of events in the FRU
History Event List remains the same as what the initial event displayed. This list does not change.
The Report and Repair tabs show information that is specific to the history event, but the Close
Event and FRU Test buttons at the bottom of the Event Details dialog box are grayed out because the history event already is in the Closed or Verified state.
3.
To return to the non-history event that appeared initially, click Initial Event.
Viewing Event Details Reports
The library creates a key report for each issue that occurs. As updates to the issue occur, the library creates subordinate reports that it associates with the key report. Typically, you should examine the key report because it represents the earliest time at which the event reached its highest severity level. It often isolates the most significant problem.
To display all report information that is associated with an event, click the Report tab on the Event
Details dialog box. See
“Using System Status Buttons to Display Event Lists” (page 184)
.
By default, the Report # area displays report details for either the key report or, if subordinate reports exist, the most recent subordinate report.
the elements on the Report tab:
190 Troubleshooting your Library
Table 37 Event Details Dialog Box, Report Tab
Element
In the Reports Tree area:
Report tree area
Description
Provides a hierarchy of report information that is associated with the event. Descriptions includes reason text that describes the cause of the report.
Initially, only the highest level of the report tree appears.
Clicking this level (Reports for Event #) reveals one or more second-level reports, and clicking a second-level report reveals one or more third-level reports.
Second-level reports function essentially as containers of third-level reports. A event in the Open state has one or more third-level reports, including one key report.
The key report represents the earliest time at which the event reached its highest severity level. It often isolates the most significant problem. A event in the Closed or Verified state does not have a key report.
In the Report # area:
Report ID
Posted
Duplicates
Status Group
Severity
FRU ID
FRU Instance
FRU Category
Reason
The library-assigned identifier for the report.
The date and time on which the library created the report.
For open events only, the number of times that the library created the same report. If the identical issue occurs while the event remains open, the library creates an identical report and increments the report's duplicate count. If the library has not created duplicate reports, the value is zero
(0).
The subsystem that caused the event. Possible subsystems are:
•
Connectivity
•
Drives
•
Control
•
Power
•
Cooling
•
Robotics
The severity level that is associated with the status group
(subsystem). Possible levels are:
•
Failed
•
Degraded
•
Warning
•
Good
The identifier for the FRU.
In libraries with multiple FRUs of the same kind, the specific
FRU that caused the report. This field usually identifies a particular FRU by its location in the library (for example,
[1,1,1,8,1,1] for a drive sled). If the library has only one instance of the FRU, this field is blank.
The category to which the FRU belongs.
A brief explanation of why the FRU caused the report.
Reasons describe the causes of issues.
Viewing Event Details 191
Table 37 Event Details Dialog Box, Report Tab (continued)
Error Code
Modifier
Repair Link
Report Description
A number that is associated with a particular issue that caused the event report. Because more than one issue can cause a report, an error code provides another level of detail to what the report provides. The error code maps to a portion of library firmware code, which a trained analyst can examine to determine the root cause of an issue. This information is for technical support use only.
A numerical qualifier, in hexadecimal format, that provides context for an error condition. A modifier adds another level of detail to what the error code provides. If a modifier does not exist for the error condition, this field is set to 0x0.
This information is for technical support use only.
The name of the repair page that is associated with the report.
A summary description of the report.
Viewing Repair Pages
Repair pages provide problem descriptions and corrective actions that you or a CSE can perform.
To display the repair page that is associated with an event, click Repair on the Event Details dialog box.
The repair page provides the following information:
•
The title at the top of the repair page is a brief description of the issue.
•
The Problem section describes the issue in more detail.
192 Troubleshooting your Library
•
The User and Customer Service Engineer Actions section provides corrective actions that the user or the Customer Service Engineer (CSE) can perform.
•
The Customer Service Engineer Actions section provides additional corrective actions that the
CSE can perform. If you are a user, do not perform these steps. Contact technical support for assistance.
NOTE: If you are a CSE, see the HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library Service
Guide for detailed maintenance action plans, and for removal and replacement procedures.
•
The Technical Support Information section provides a comprehensive list of FRUs that could be involved.
•
Text on the repair pages can include links to specific Online Help pages, which appear in place of the repair page when you click them. Navigation buttons near the top of the Repair tab enable you to access Online Help pages as follows:
◦
The < Back button returns you to the previously viewed page (either a previously viewed
Online Help page or the repair page).
◦
The Next > button returns you to the page that you were viewing before you clicked the
< Back button.
◦
The Content button displays a table of contents for the Online Help system.
Viewing Tape Alerts
Tape alerts are issued by a drive whenever there is a problem in the drive that relates to a tape cartridge. The problem can be with the drive or with the tape cartridge. You can generate tape alert reports from Reports on the menu.
You can use these reports to cross-reference tape alerts for drives and tape cartridges over a specified period of time, in order to determine if the problem belongs to the drive or to a specific tape cartridge. Typically, tape alerts point to a drive problem if a specific drive exhibits tape alerts against multiple pieces of media. Conversely, tape alerts point to a media problem if a specific piece of media exhibits tape alerts against multiple drives.
Creating a Tape Alert History Report
To view a tape alert history report:
1.
Click Tools
→Reports→Media→Tape Alert History.
2.
To use a previously-saved template (see
“Saving Report Criteria Templates” (page 53)
) select it from the Templates drop-down menu.
3.
To customize the report: a.
To change date range, select the appropriate value from the Range field drop-down menu.
b.
To change the grouping, select the appropriate value from the Grouping field drop-down menu.
c.
To include the barcode, the physical SN of the drive, or any tape alerts, click to select the boxes next to the appropriate fields.
d.
To select the type of report, select the appropriate value from the Type field drop-down menu.
e.
To sort the information, select the appropriate sorting method from the Sort By field drop-down menu.
f.
To specify the type of output, select the appropriate chart type from the Chart field drop-down menu.
After you make any change to the Specify Report Criteria section, the Save button is activated in the Templates region of the dialog box.
Viewing Event Details 193
4.
To save the settings as a template for later use, click Save, type the appropriate value into the
Enter Template Name dialog box, then click OK.
5.
Click View to display the Tape Alert History Report.
6.
To sort the data, click the heading of any column. Toggle the order by clicking the heading again.
7.
Click Preview to preview the report as it will be saved or printed.
8.
To save the report as a PDF file, click the PDF icon at the top of the preview window, enter the appropriate information in the Saving Report into a PDF-File dialog box, then click Confirm.
9.
To print the report, click the Print icon at the top of the preview window, make the appropriate selections in the Print dialog box, then click OK.
10.
Click the Close icon at the top of the preview window to exit.
11.
Click Close to exit the Tape Alert History Report.
12.
To e-mail or save the report: a.
Click Export.
b.
To e-mail the report, select the radio button next to Email, then select or type in the email address, type in a comment (optional), then click OK.
c.
To save the report, select the radio button next to Save, browse to or type in the path and file name where the report is to be saved, then click OK.
13.
Click Cancel to exit the Tape Alert History Report dialog box.
Emailing, Saving, and Printing Event Information
The Send button on the Event Details dialog box enables you to send detailed event information, including all report details, to e-mail addresses. If you are accessing the LMC from a remote client,
Send also enables you to save the information to a file or print it.
NOTE: You can mail, save, or print event information from a remote client. However, you cannot save or print the information from the library OCP.
Event information that a user sends by using the Send button is essentially the same as the information that the library automatically provides in e-mail notifications (see
). The only differences are that the subject line states “Library Information” and the body of the message does not have a “REASON FOR AUTOMATED E-MAIL” section, but it has a “REPAIR AND TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS ATTACHED” section.
The message body also includes the following information, which provides details about the event and library conditions at the time of the event:
•
Event summary
•
Event details, including status information
•
Firmware versions, including MCB, RCU, CMB, and drive bricks
•
Physical library configuration
•
Library states, such as physical library online or offline, partitions online or offline, or robotics enabled or disabled.
•
Time stamps of recent activity
•
Report summary
•
Report details for the event
The repair page attachment is in HTML format.
NOTE: Before you perform the following procedure, you must make sure that e-mail is appropriately configured in the LMC so that the library can send event details to the recipient. See
“Configuring E-mail” (page 47) .
194 Troubleshooting your Library
To mail, save, or print information for a particular event, perform the following steps:
1.
Make sure that the Event Details dialog box displays information for the event that you want to send. See
“Displaying Event Lists” (page 184)
and
“Viewing Event Details” (page 186) .
2.
Click Send.
The Event Information dialog box appears.
3.
Perform one of the following tasks:
•
To indicate that you want to send the information as an e-mail message to a recipient, select Email, and then either type an e-mail address in the Email text box or select an existing address from the drop-down list. You can type a comment in the Comment text box to send with the information.
•
To indicate that you want to save the information, select Save, and then either type in the
Save text box a path and a file name to which you want the information saved, or click
Browse to specify a location and a file name.
NOTE: The Save option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
•
To indicate that you want to send the information to a printer, select Print.
NOTE: The Print option is available to remote client users only. It appears grayed out on the OCP.
4.
To send, click OK.
Running Verification Tests to Determine Issue Resolution
A event is always generated against a particular FRU when the library detects an issue. Therefore, the library provides FRU tests that you can run to determine whether the conditions that caused the event have been resolved. Running the FRU tests is an important part of ensuring that the system is working properly.
The library can detect issues under the following contexts:
•
When the library polls at regular intervals, or
•
When a host or user commands the library to perform an operation (such as occurs with GUI commands, host inventory, and host move media).
FRU tests are designed to help resolve issues under the second context.
During FRU testing, the library creates operational scenarios to evaluate the functionality of a FRU.
FRU tests attempt to evaluate as many aspects of the FRU as possible, but they might not fully recreate the conditions that caused the original event. The library cannot recreate all conditions and, therefore, the library does not provide tests for some FRUs.
The instructions on the event repair page direct you to run a FRU test if an applicable one exists.
If you run the test and the results are all good, the library automatically transitions the event to the
Verified state.
NOTE: If you cannot run a test, make sure that you complete the repair page instructions and, if needed, physically examine the FRU. After you determine that the issue is resolved, manually transition the event to the Closed state. See
“Closing Events” (page 196) . After you close the event,
the library transitions the event to the Verified state if it is able to do so.
Viewing Event Details 195
You can access the tests in two ways:
•
On the main LMC display, click Tools
→Verification Tests. The Verification Tests dialog box appears. From this dialog box, you can choose from a variety of verification tests, including the FRU tests.
•
On the Event Details dialog box, click FRU Test.
NOTE: The FRU Test button is available only if the event FRU has an applicable verification test that you can run.
The Verification Tests dialog box appears with the appropriate test already selected and ready to start.
Closing Events
Manually close an event if all of the following conditions are true:
•
You have completed the repair page instructions to resolve the issue (for example, replaced a FRU).
•
The FRU Test button on the Event Details dialog box is not available. This means that an applicable verification test does not exist for the event FRU.
NOTE: If the FRU Test button is available for an event, you should use it to access and run the verification test. You should not manually close it. The verification test determines whether the issue is resolved, and the library automatically transitions the event to the Verified state if the test passes without problems. See
“Running Verification Tests to Determine Issue Resolution”
.
•
The issue has been resolved, but the event remains in an Open state (for example, when defective media has been replaced in the library).
You should manually transition an event to the Closed state after physically examining the FRU to make sure that the issue is resolved.
Closing Individual Events
To transition an event to the Closed state, perform the following steps:
1.
Make sure that the Event Details dialog box displays information for the open event that you want to close. See
“Displaying Event Lists” (page 184)
and
“Viewing Event Details” (page 186)
.
2.
Click Close Event.
The event's state changes to Closed. If the library is able to do so, it automatically transitions the closed event to the Verified state.
NOTE: If the identical issue occurs again within 30 minutes after the event transitions to the
Closed or Verified state, the library reopens the event and increments the event duplicate count.
Events that are in the Closed or Verified state for more than 30 minutes cannot be reopened.
In this case, if the identical problem occurs again, the library creates a new event.
Closing Multiple Events
You can use this method when you have many events relating to the same issue, for example, when you have many drives in a library or many tape alerts.
To transition multiple events to the Closed state, do the following:
196 Troubleshooting your Library
1.
On the Event List dialog box, select each event you want to close by clicking the check box.
See
“Displaying Event Lists” (page 184)
and
“Viewing Event Details” (page 186) .
2.
Click Close Events.
3.
In the Attention message box, click Yes to confirm that you want to close multiple events.
The event state changes to Closed. If the library is able to do so, it automatically transitions the closed events to the Verified state.
Generating the Events Report
The Events Report lets you see how many events occurred in a particular time period. You can choose to group events by subsystem, module, or FRU, and the results can be presented as a rollup summary or as a trend so you can see if the number of issues is increasing or decreasing over time. Also, the report results can be presented in different chart formats, such as bar graphs or pie charts.
After generating a report, you can print it or save it as a PDF file. In addition, you can save a set of report criteria as a template for reports you frequently generate.
Specifying Events Report Criteria
To generate the Events Report, first specify the report criteria, and then view the report.
1.
Log on as an administrator.
2.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Events.
The Report Criteria dialog box appears.
3.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Events Report.
summarizes the available report criteria options.
Viewing Event Details 197
Table 38 Events Report Criteria
Criteria
Range
Grouping
Attribute
Type
Chart
Description
Specifies the range of time to cover in the report. Choices include:
• Historical
• Current Month
• Last Month
• Last 3 Months
• Last 6 Months
• Last 12 Months
• Last 30 Days (default)
• Last 7 Days
Determines how events are grouped in the report. Choices include:
• Subsystem (default)—events are grouped according to subsystem
• FRU Category—events are grouped according to FRU category
• FRU Id—events are grouped according to FRU ID
• Serial Number—events are grouped according to module serial number
• Selected Drive by Physical SN—events are grouped according to drive serial number (displays the Choose
Drive dialog box)
Determines how events are identified in the report.
Choices include:
• All (default)—events are separated according to attribute (Failed, Degraded, Warning, or Other)
• Total—events are not separated according to attribute
Specifies the type of report. Choices include:
• Rollup (default)—displays the values based on the selected grouping
• Trend—shows the occurrence of events over time
(grouping criteria is not used)
Determines the type of chart. Choices include:
• Area
• Bar
• Bar 3D
• Line
• Stacked Area
• Stacked Bar (default)
• Stacked Bar 3D
• Pie
• Pie 3D
4.
Click View.
The Report Viewer dialog box appears. The content and appearance of the report varies depending on the selected criteria.
198 Troubleshooting your Library
5.
When you are finished viewing the Events Report, click Close.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Printing or Exporting a Report to PDF
After generating the Events Report, you can print it or export it to a PDF file.
To print or export a report to PDF:
1.
On the Report Viewer dialog box, click Preview. The Print Preview dialog box appears.
2.
Do one or more of the following:
•
To navigate through the pages of the report, click Back or Next.
•
To increase or decrease the magnification of the report, click Zoom In or Zoom Out.
•
To print the report, click Print. Specify print options, and then click OK.
•
To save the report as a PDF file, click PDF. Specify a file path and file name, and then click Confirm.
3.
When you are finished working with the Print Preview dialog box, click Close.
NOTE: You cannot print reports or save them to a PDF file using the OCP.
Exporting a Report to an E-mail or a Text File
Instead of viewing the report as a chart, you can e-mail the report data to an e-mail address. Or export the report data to a comma delimited text file (*.csv) for use in other programs.
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Events. The Report Criteria dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Events Report.
Table 6 summarizes the available report criteria options.
3.
Click Export.
The Export Raw Data dialog box appears.
4.
Do one of the following:
•
To send the report data to an e-mail address, click Email. Type or select the e-mail address, type an optional comment in the Comment box, and then click OK.
•
To save the report data to a comma delimited text file, click Save. Specify a file path and file name, and then click OK.
5.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Saving a Report Template
If you frequently generate the Events Report with the same set of report criteria, save the criteria as a template. Loading the template recalls the saved report criteria and lets you quickly generate a report based on the saved criteria.
1.
On the menu bar, click Tools
→Reports→Events. The Report Criteria dialog box appears.
2.
Under Specify Report Criteria, click criteria options in the lists to customize the content and appearance of the Events Report.
Table 6 summarizes the available report criteria options.
3.
Under Templates, click Save.
4.
Type a name for the template, and then click OK.
The template appears in the list under Templates.
Viewing Event Details 199
5.
To load the saved report criteria at a later time, click the template in the list, and then click
View to generate the report.
6.
To close the Report Criteria dialog box, click Cancel.
Interpreting LEDs
LEDs can help you assess the state of a library component. The primary library LEDs can be grouped as follows:
•
Blade status LEDs
•
Drive status LEDs
•
Fibre port link LEDs
•
MCB port LEDs
•
LBX terminator LEDs
•
Power supply status LEDs
Interpreting Blade Status LEDs
Each of the following library blades has a set of green, amber, and blue LEDs that indicate blade processor status, health status, and power control status:
•
Management control blade (MCB)
•
Control management blade (CMB)
•
Robotics control unit (RCU)
•
Library motor drive (LMD)
•
Ethernet Expansion Blade (EEB)
shows the locations and colors of the status LEDs on the five blades that can be in the library.
Figure 26 Colors of Blade Status LEDs
1. Management control blade
3. Library motor drive
5. Ethernet expansion blade
2. Robotics control unit
4. LEDs
6. Control management blade
Blade status LEDs provide troubleshooting information that you can use in conjunction with events that the library creates. However, the LEDs might not directly correspond to events. The LEDs can indicate a firmware or hardware problem so severe that the library cannot create or display an
200 Troubleshooting your Library
event. For example, if the MCB firmware becomes inoperable, the amber LED flashes at 1Hz, but the library might not be able to display any related events.
For a description of each LED color and what its state might mean, see
a description of how the blade status LEDs appear under normal conditions, see
.
Table 39 Explanations of blade status LED states
LED Color
Green
Represents
Processor status
Amber
Blue
Health status
Power control status
Possible states and explanations
•
Solid off — blade main processor is not operating (or blade is booting)
•
Solid on — blade main processor is not operating
(however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on indicates that the LMD main processor is operating normally)
•
Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — blade main processor is operating normally
•
Blinks 10 times every second (10 Hz) — identify mode
•
Solid on for three seconds, then blinks twice at 1 Hz, and then repeats — blade firmware is downloading
•
Solid off — blade power and control subsystem is operating normally
•
Solid on — blade power and control subsystem has failed
Solid on also can mean that the blade power and control subsystem firmware is autoleveling. In conjunction with the blue amber LED blinking one time every 10 seconds, this is a normal condition. Autoleveling takes about three minutes for each blade, and blades within an I/O management unit autolevel in series. It can take as long as three minutes for the power and control subsystem to download. Never remove a blade when the amber LED is solid on unless it has been on continuously for at least 10 minutes.
•
Solid off — blade is not receiving power
•
Solid on — blade is powered down; ready to be replaced (swap mode)
•
Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is powered on; operating normally
Table 40 Blade Status LED States - Normal Conditions
LED Color
Green
Amber
Blue
State and Explanation
Blinks one time every second (1Hz) — blade main processor is operating normally (however, this does not apply to the LMD; solid on indicates that the
LMD main process is operating normally)
Solid off — no errors are detected; blade PIP is operating normally
Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — blade is powered on; operating normally
Actions Based on LED States
When the system is operating properly, service actions should be based on events first and foremost.
However, some situations occur when the amber LED indicates problems that are not detected by the event system. You should always act on any amber LED that is solidly on, which indicates that the component power and control subsystem has failed. In this case, replace the component.
Interpreting LEDs 201
When you replace a blade FRU or escalate a problem based on LED states, perform the following steps:
1.
Observe and report the timing pattern of the blue, amber, and green LED group. Spend at least 30 seconds observing the LEDs and record the results in the service request (SR) and on any equipment failure report form that you return with the part. Proper reporting of all LED states is critical for determining the root cause of the failure.
2.
Create a support ticket and send it to technical support for analysis.
Interpreting Drive Status LEDs
The library reports all drive issues that can affect customer operations. In addition to examining library reports, you should observe drive sled link LED and status LED activity.
shows the locations of the status LEDs and the FC link LED on the rear of a drive sled.
Figure 27 Rear View of FC Drive Sled (LTO-4 and LTO-5 Drives)
1. LTO-4 drive
3. Ethernet port
5. Link LEDs (FC Port 1 — left, FC Port 2 — right)
2. Status LEDs
4. LTO-5 drive
describes how to interpret the drive sled status LED activity that you might see on the rear of a drive sled.
202 Troubleshooting your Library
Table 41 Drive Sled Status LED States
LED color
Green
Represents
Processor status
Amber
Blue
Health status¨
Power control status
Possible states and explanations
•
Solid off — drive sled main processor is not operating (or blade is booting)
•
Solid on — drive sled main processor is not operating
•
Blinks one time every second (1 Hz) — drive sled main processor is operating normally
•
Blinks 10 times every second (10 Hz) — identify mode
•
Solid on for three seconds, then blinks twice at 1
Hz, and then repeats — drive sled or drive brick firmware is downloading
•
Blinks three times in three seconds (1 Hz), then pauses (solid off), and then repeats — drive brick is activating (varying on)
•
Solid off — drive sled controller (drive DC to DC converter [DDC]) is operating normally
•
Solid on — drive sled DDC has failed
•
Solid off — drive sled is not receiving power
•
Solid on — drive brick is powered down; ready to be replaced (swap mode) or varied on
•
Blinks one time every 10 seconds (flash) — drive brick is powered on; operating normally
Interpreting Fibre Port Link LED
A fibre port link LED shows the state of the Fibre Channel link and whether the link is ready to transmit commands.
Drive Sled Fibre Channel Link LED
The Fibre Channel link LED for a drive sled is located on the rear of the drive sled.
shows the location of the Fibre Channel link LED on the rear of the LTO drive sled.
NOTE:
describes the Fibre Channel link LED activity on the rear of the LTO drive sled.
Table 42 FC Drive Sled Link LED States
LED color
Green
Represents
LIP and activity
State and explanation
•
Solid on — loop initialization protocol (LIP) has occurred (for example, Passive Mode).
•
Blinks at irregular intervals — host command/data activity is occurring.
Amber
No color
Online and light detected •
Solid on — the library has enabled the drive data bus; it can detect light through a fiber optic cable.
•
Blinks at regular intervals — the library has enabled the drive data bus, but light is not detected through the fiber optic cable.
Solid off — the library has not enabled the drive data bus or the drive brick is varied off.
Interpreting LEDs 203
Table 42 FC Drive Sled Link LED States (continued)
LED color Represents State and explanation
If the drive brick is varied off, the blue status
LED will be solid on.
Interpreting MCB Port LEDs
The MCB has LEDs for the Ethernet and Fibre Channel ports.
MCB Ethernet Port LEDs
The LEDs on the MCB Ethernet port indicate status and activity.
shows the locations and colors of the MCB Ethernet port LEDs.
Figure 28 Locations - Colors of MCB Ethernet Port LEDs
1. MCB Ethernet port LEDs
describes how to interpret the Ethernet port LED activity that you might see.
Table 43 MCB Ethernet Port LED Activity
LED Color
Green
Amber
Possible States and Explanations
•
Solid on — the link is up; data can be sent or received through the Ethernet port
•
Solid off — the link is not up; data cannot be sent or received through the Ethernet port
•
Flashes at irregular intervals — data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
•
Solid off — no data activity is occurring through the Ethernet port
MCB Fibre Channel Port LEDs
The LEDs for the MCB Fibre Channel ports are for future use. Ignore LED behaviors that might appear.
shows the locations and colors of the LEDs.
204 Troubleshooting your Library
Figure 29 Locations - Colors MCB FC Port LEDs
1. MCB Ethernet port LEDs
Interpreting LBX Terminator LEDs
The LBX terminator has six green LEDs that indicate the presence of modules in the library.
Figure 30 Locations of LBX Terminator LEDs
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
NOTE: See
for callout explanations of
Table 44 LBX LED Version 03
LED On/Off Combinations
1 2 3 4
Off Off Off Off
5
Off
6
Off
Explanation
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Robotics are disabled, the access door is open, or the LBX terminator is misaligned.
The library has one control module and no expansion modules.
The library has one control module and one expansion module.
The library has one control module and two expansion modules.
The library has one control module and three expansion modules.
The library has one control module and four expansion modules.
The library has one control module and five expansion modules.
The library has one control module and six expansion modules.
The library has one control module and seven expansion modules.
The library has one control module and eight expansion modules.
Interpreting LEDs 205
Table 44 LBX LED Version 03 (continued)
On
On
On
LED On/Off Combinations
1 2 3 4
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
5
Off
On
On
6
Off
Off
On
Explanation
The library has one control module and nine expansion modules.
The library has one control module and ten expansion modules.
The library has one control module and eleven expansion modules.
Interpreting Power Supply LEDs
Power supply problems are reported in events. To physically identify a power supply, note the power supply number and module number in the event details. Modules can have up to two power supplies each. The top supply is #1 and the bottom supply is #2.
NOTE: The library can be physically configured to include up to seven expansion modules. If any of the expansion modules include drives, those modules also will have power supplies.
shows the locations and colors of the power supply LEDs.
Figure 31 Locations and Colors of Power Supply LEDs
1. Power supply LEDs
describes how to interpret LED activity that you might see.
206 Troubleshooting your Library
Table 45 Explanation of Power Supply LED States
LED Color
Green (top LED)
Represents
AC OK
Green (middle LED) DC OK
Blue (bottom LED) Fault
Possible States and Explanations
•
Solid on — power supply AC input is above minimum requirements to operate
•
Solid off — power supply AC input is below minimum requirements to operate
Solid on — power supply output voltage is within specifications
•
Solid off — power supply's output voltage is outside of specifications
•
Solid on — indicates any of the following conditions:
◦ Power supply output is outside of specifications
◦ Current limit has been exceeded
◦ Temperature limit has been exceeded
◦ AC input is below minimum operating voltage
◦ PDU is on, but the Power button on the library's indicator panel is off
◦ Fan failed while AC input is present and above minimum operating voltage
•
Solid off — no faults are detected
Accessing Online Help
For further help, you can access the library Online Help system.
•
To access the entire Online Help system, click Help, then Content.
•
To access context-sensitive help, click Help from any dialog box.
Accessing Online Help 207
9 Support and other resources
For more information and support, see the following:
•
•
•
•
Contacting HP
For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website: http://www.hp.com/support
Before contacting HP, collect the following information:
•
Product model names and numbers
•
Support contract (if applicable)
•
Product serial numbers
•
Error messages
•
Operating system type and revision level
HP websites
For additional information, see the following HP websites:
• http://www.hp.com
• http://www.hp.com/go/storage
• http://www.hp.com/service_locator
• http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
• http://www.hp.com/support/downloads
• http://www.hp.com/storage/whitepapers
Typographic conventions
Table 46 Document conventions
Convention
Blue text:
Blue, underlined text: http://www.hp.com
Bold text
Italic text
Element
Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses
Website addresses
•
Keys that are pressed
•
Text entered into a GUI element, such as a box
•
GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Text emphasis
208 Support and other resources
Table 46 Document conventions (continued)
Convention
Monospace text
Monospace, italic
text
Monospace, bold
text
Element
•
File and directory names
•
System output
•
Code
•
Commands, their arguments, and argument values
•
Code variables
•
Command variables
Emphasized monospace text
WARNING!
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.
CAUTION: Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
IMPORTANT: Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.
NOTE: Provides additional information.
Rack stability
Rack stability protects personnel and equipment.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to equipment:
•
Extend leveling jacks to the floor.
•
Ensure that the full weight of the rack rests on the leveling jacks.
•
In multiple-rack installations, fasten racks together securely.
Rack stability 209
A ESKM Management Solutions
The ESL G3 supports HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) which generates, protects, stores, and manages encryption keys. The ESL G3 library automatically acquires and delivers these keys to the tape drives to encrypt information being written to, and decrypt information being read from, tape media.
NOTE: The encryption key management feature of ESL G3 can only be configured by those logged in with security-level permissions.
You must have an ESKM license installed on your library in order to use the encryption key management features described in this chapter.
Setting up ESKM on the ESL G3 consists of the following steps:
•
“Enabling the ESKM License Key” (page 210)
•
“Configuring Encryption Key Management” (page 210)
•
“Changing library partitions after initial ESKM setup” (page 213)
Enabling the ESKM License Key
To enable the ESKM license key:
1.
From the menu bar, click Setup
→Licenses.
The Licenses dialog box appears.
This dialog box lists the licensed features for your library, including their status, expiration date, and quantity.
2.
To enable a license key, type the appropriate license key in the Enter License Key box.
You do not need to highlight the feature before you enter a license key. License keys are not case sensitive and are all inclusive. For example, J2BGL-22622-52C22 can be entered as j2bgl-22622-52c22.549.
3.
Click OK.
Configuring Encryption Key Management
The HP ESL G3 Key Management Setup Wizard guides you through configuring the library and drives to enable a key management strategy using HP ESKM. Ensure all library configurations are complete, and the library is fully operational prior to configuring the encryption key management feature. Also, before using the library configuration wizard, be sure to complete all steps in the
ESKM Configuration Guide for use with HP Tape Libraries.
The following sections are available to initially configure, or to modify the configuration of, the encryption key management feature:
•
“Using Select Key Management Type” (page 211)
•
“Using Update Key Manager Configuration” (page 212)
•
“Using Update Key Manager Certificate” (page 212)
•
“Using Verify Key Manager Connectivity” (page 213)
NOTE: Each ESL G3 library must have a user account on the ESKM servers, and that account must exist prior to running the Key Management Setup Wizard. The steps to configure the library user account are in the document ESKM Configuration Guide for use with HP Tape Libraries.
NOTE: HP strongly recommends that the ESKM servers be tested after the Setup Wizard is complete, to ensure encryption is functioning, and to ensure that the cluster failover configuration is correct. The steps to perform those validation tests are documented in ESKM Configuration Guide
for use with HP Tape Libraries.
210 ESKM Management Solutions
Using Select Key Management Type
Keys may be managed by either a Key Manager, or by your backup application software. To make the selection:
1.
Log on as security.
2.
Click Setup
→Encryption→Key Management Setup Wizard.
3.
Click Next to display the Key Management Selection page of the wizard, on which HP
Enterprise Secure Key Manager is selected by default.
4.
Click Next to display the Certificate Authority Information page of the wizard.
5.
Read through the information, ensure you have met the prerequisites, then click Next.
6.
Click to select the radio button next to the type of Certificate Authority to use, then click Next.
7.
If you selected HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (E SKM) Local Authority: a.
Follow the instructions on the Retrieve the Local Certificate Authority Certificate, then click
Next.
b.
Locate and copy the signed certificate from the ESKM local authority, paste the text of the certificate into the text box on the Certificate Authority Certificate Entry page, then click Next.
c.
Follow the instructions on the Library Certificates Information screen, then click Next.
d.
Copy the text of the certificate shown, then click Next.
e.
Read the Sign your Library Certificate page, follow the instructions, then click Next.
f.
Paste the text of the certificate into the text box on the Signed Certificate Entry page, then click Next.
g.
Read the HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager Information page and click Next.
h.
Type the Library Username, and Password in the appropriate fields in the HP Enterprise
Secure Key Manager Configuration page, then click Next.
IMPORTANT: You must first configure the username and password for this library in the
ESKM Management Console.
i.
In the Tier #1 region of the dialog box, type the name of an ESKM Node address into the ESKM Node Address #1 field, add any other node addresses to the tier as appropriate.
NOTE: Tiers are a way to indicate which ESKM servers a library should contact first when it needs to get an encryption key. For example, to avoid network performance issues, you might want a library to access local ESKM servers before remote ESKM servers.
To specify this, you would enter the local ESKM server in tier 1 and the remote ESKM servers in tier 2. The library will try to get a key from any of the ESKM servers in tier 1 first. If none of the ESKM servers in tier 1 respond, it will move to tier 2. If you add or remove an ESKM from your network, you will need to update the tier information by running the Key Management Setup Wizard and selecting Update Key Manager
Configuration on the first page of the wizard.
j.
To change the SSL port number for the node in the tier from the default, click Advanced, enter the correct value in the Port Number field, then click OK.
k.
To add another tier, select the Add another tier box and enter information as you did for
Tier #1.
l.
In the Key Management Setup Summary page of the wizard, review the information, correct it if necessary, then click Finish.
Configuring Encryption Key Management 211
8.
If you selected Third-Party Certificate Authority: a.
Copy the signed certificate text (without extra spaces before or after the text) into the text box on the Certificate Authority Certificate Entry, then click Next.
b.
Follow the instructions on the Library Certificates Information screen, then click Next.
c.
Copy the text of the certificate shown, then click Next.
d.
Paste the text of the certificate into the text box on the Signed Certificate Entry page, then click Next.
e.
Read the HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager Information page and click Next.
f.
Type the Library Username, and Password in the appropriate fields in the HP Enterprise
Secure Key Manager Configuration page, then click Next.
IMPORTANT: You must first configure the username and password for this library in the
ESKM Management Console.
g.
In the Tier #1 region of the dialog box, type the name of an ESKM Node address into the ESKM Node Address #1 field, add any other node addresses to the tier as appropriate.
h.
To change the SSL port number for the node in the tier from the default, click Advanced, enter the correct value in the Port Number field, then click OK.
i.
To add another tier, select the Add another tier box and enter information as you did for
Tier #1.
j.
In the Key Management Setup Summary page of the wizard, review the information, correct it if necessary, then click Finish.
Using Update Key Manager Configuration
Select this option to modify any key manager configuration property except the Certificate Authority certificate, and the client certificate:
1.
Log on as security.
2.
Click Setup
→Encryption→Key Management Setup Wizard.
3.
Click Next to display the Key Management Selection page of the wizard.
4.
Click to select the radio button for Update Key Manager Configuration, then click Next.
5.
Read the information that displays, then click Next.
6.
The configuration screens display the current settings. Either retain the values, or type new values into the appropriate fields, then click Next.
7.
In the Key Management Setup Summary page of the wizard, review the information, correct it if necessary, then click Finish.
Using Update Key Manager Certificate
When a library client certificate expires, you must enter information for a new certificate. Use this procedure to change the Certificate Authority certificate or enter the new certificate information:
1.
Log on as security.
2.
Click Setup
→Encryption→Key Management Setup Wizard.
3.
Click Next to display the Key Management Selection page of the wizard.
4.
Click to select the radio button for Update Key Manager Certificate, then click Next.
5.
Click to select the radio button for the appropriate Certificate Selection (CA certificate, library certificate, or both), then click Next.
6.
Read the information that displays, follow the instructions, then click Next.
7.
The configuration screens display the current settings. Either retain the values, or type new values into the appropriate fields, then click Next.
8.
In the Key Management Setup Summary page of the wizard, review the information, correct it if necessary, then click Finish.
212 ESKM Management Solutions
Using Verify Key Manager Connectivity
This option may be run at any time. The library will login to the key management servers using
SSL/TLS, authenticate using the username and password, and retrieve the key generation policies for each partition. To verify key manager connectivity:
1.
Click Setup
→Encryption→Key Management Setup Wizard.
2.
Click Next to display the Key Management Selection page of the wizard.
3.
Click to select the radio button for Verify Key Manager Connectivity, then click Next.
4.
In the Key Management Setup Summary page of the wizard, review the information, correct it if necessary, then click Finish.
5.
A dialog box displays the connectivity status. Click OK to exit the dialog box.
Changing library partitions after initial ESKM setup
When you add or remove partitions in a library that is enrolled with the ESKM, you must also add or remove the key generation policy for that partition using the ESKM Management Console software. (For instructions, see the ESKM User Guide for use with HP Tape Libraries.) Until the library configuration and the ESKM policies match, the library will report an Invalid Encryption
Configuration error.
Configuring Encryption Key Management 213
B Frequently Asked Questions
Where do I find installation instructions? The library requires that a trained HP Support Engineer perform the installation.
Where are error messages described? When the library detects issues, it sends you e-mail notifications and creates events that provide you with detailed information about the issues and corrective actions you can perform. A event can direct you to obtain further help from technical support. For more information about troubleshooting, see
“Troubleshooting your Library” (page
.
How do I clean a drive? Use your backup software to clean the drives. For detailed instructions, see
“Using Cleaning Cartridges” (page 164) .
How do I know when the drives need cleaning? The host application informs you when drives need to be cleaned. See
“Using Cleaning Cartridges” (page 164) .
What is a partition? A partition is an abstraction of a single underlying physical library that presents the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of file management, access by multiple users, or dedication to one or more host applications. It is a collection of real physical elements, combined to create a grouping that is different from the physical library, and is often dedicated to a single host application. For example, you can choose to run one software application in one partition and a different software application in a second partition. For more information, see
“Working With Partitions” (page 25)
. To learn how to create a partition, see
.
Where can I find the library serial number? The serial number appears in the ID column for the first line of output on the System Status dialog box (select Monitor
→System). Use the serial number when contacting technical support for assistance.
How many characters can be in the barcodes? For LTO media barcodes, the library dynamically supports 1 to 14 characters for volume serial number plus a two-character media type identifier.
The image below is an example of a supported LTO barcode label.
What barcode formats are supported? Cartridges must have an external barcode label that is machine-readable to identify the volume serial number. A barcode must use only uppercase letters
A to Z and/or numeric values 0 to 9. The library currently supports Code 39 (3 of 9) type barcode labels.
What do I do if I lose my password? Contact technical support, and they will tell you how to reset the password. See
What do I do if I lose power during a backup? If your library contains a redundant power supply, it is unlikely that power will ever be completely unavailable to the library.
The library should recover even if power goes out completely during a backup. If power remains off, press the Power button, and leave it in the off position until you can obtain a reliable power source. When the power to the library is turned back on, the library will recover. You must re-run the backup using your application software.
If the library does not automatically come back up after a power outage, cycle library power.
Cycling library power involves shutting down the library, powering it off, and then powering it on.
For more information, see
“Shutting Down/Rebooting the Library” (page 95) ,
Library” (page 96) , and “Powering On the Library” (page 96)
. The blue LED on the power supply will be on and not blinking.
214 Frequently Asked Questions
C Product Safety Statements
This product is designed for data storage and retrieval using magnetic tape. Any other application is not considered the intended use. HP will not be held liable for damage arising from unauthorized use of the product. The user assumes all risk in this aspect.
This unit is engineered and manufactured to meet all safety and regulatory requirements. Be aware that improper use may result in bodily injury, damage to the equipment, or interference with other equipment.
WARNING!
Read all operating instructions in this manual before powering on or using this equipment.
CAUTION: Read all operating instructions in this manual before operating this product.
NOTE: When drive sled positions are empty, drive cover plates must be installed and in place at all times to prevent access into the empty drive sled positions, and promote proper air flow and cooling.
Mechanical Locks
The access and service doors can be locked with a key. The key should be kept by an authorized person at your company. Access to the interior of the library is both a data-integrity and a safety issue.
Power Button on the Library Indicator Panel
Switching off the Power button on the indicator panel, located on the front of the library, removes power from the electronics, which causes the picker to stop immediately. This button also removes power from the drives.
WARNING!
This power button functions as a power interrupt only. To completely remove all power before servicing or in an emergency, turn off the circuit breaker on the power distribution unit, and then disconnect the power cord from the electrical source.
Mechanical Locks 215
D Regulatory statements
Federal Communications Commission notice
Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations has established
Radio Frequency (RF) emission limits to provide an interference-free radio frequency spectrum.
Many electronic devices, including computers, generate RF energy incidental to their intended function and are, therefore, covered by these rules. These rules place computers and related peripheral devices into two classes, A and B, depending upon their intended installation. Class A devices are those that may reasonably be expected to be installed in a business or commercial environment. Class B devices are those that may reasonably be expected to be installed in a residential environment (for example, personal computers). The FCC requires devices in both classes to bear a label indicating the interference potential of the device as well as additional operating instructions for the user.
FCC rating label
The FCC rating label on the device shows the classification (A or B) of the equipment. Class B devices have an FCC logo or ID on the label. Class A devices do not have an FCC logo or ID on the label. After you determine the class of the device, refer to the corresponding statement.
Class A equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at personal expense.
Class B equipment
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reposition or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit that is different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo, United States only
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause inappropriate operation.
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact us by mail or telephone:
•
Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000
•
Or call 1-281-514-3333
216 Regulatory statements
Modification
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Cables
When provided, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations.
Mercury Statement
Required information
Projectors, LCD displays, and some multifunction printers may use lamp(s) that contain a small amount of mercury for energy-efficient lighting purposes. Mercury lamps in these products are labeled accordingly. Please manage the lamp according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, contact the Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org
. For lamp-specific disposal information check www.lamprecycle.org
.
Canadian notice (Avis Canadien)
Class A equipment
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la class A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Class B equipment
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la class B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
European Union notice
This product complies with the following EU directives:
•
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
•
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards
(European Norms) which are listed on the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by Hewlett-Packard for this product or product family.
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g., Bluetooth).
Mercury Statement 217
Certificates can be obtained from http://www.hp.com/go/certificates .
Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany
Japanese notices
Japanese VCCI-A notice
Japanese VCCI-B notice
Japanese power cord statement
Korean notices
Class A equipment
Class B equipment
218 Regulatory statements
Taiwanese notices
BSMI Class A notice
Taiwan battery recycle statement
Turkish recycling notice
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Taiwanese notices 219
Laser compliance notices
English laser notice
This device may contain a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with
U.S. FDA regulations and the IEC 60825-1. The product does not emit hazardous laser radiation.
WARNING!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product's installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:
•
Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside.
•
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified herein.
•
Allow only HP Authorized Service technicians to repair the unit.
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
Dutch laser notice
French laser notice
220 Regulatory statements
German laser notice
Italian laser notice
Japanese laser notice
Laser compliance notices 221
Spanish laser notice
Recycling notices
English recycling notice
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private household in the European Union
This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service
222 Regulatory statements
Bulgarian recycling notice
?????????? ?? ????????? ?????????? ?? ??????????? ? ?????? ??????????? ? ??????????? ????
???? ?????? ????? ???????? ??? ?????????? ?? ???????, ?? ????????? ?? ?????? ?? ?? ???????? ??????
? ??????? ?????? ????????. ?????? ????, ?????? ?? ?????????? ????????? ?????? ? ???????? ?????,
???? ????????? ??????????? ?????????? ? ???????????? ?? ?????????? ?? ????? ?? ??????????? ??
????????????? ???????????? ? ?????????? ?????????. ?? ???????????? ?????????? ?? ???????? ? ???????
?? ???????, ????? ?????? ??????????.
Czech recycling notice
Likvidace zařízení v domácnostech v Evropské unii
Tento symbol znamená, že nesmíte tento produkt likvidovat spolu s jiným domovním odpadem. Místo toho byste měli chránit lidské zdraví a životní prostředí tím, že jej předáte na k tomu určené sběrné pracoviště, kde se zabývají recyklací elektrického a elektronického vybavení. Pro více informací kontaktujte společnost zabývající se sběrem a svozem domovního odpadu.
Danish recycling notice
Bortskaffelse af brugt udstyr hos brugere i private hjem i EU
Dette symbol betyder, at produktet ikke må bortskaffes sammen med andet husholdningsaffald. Du skal i stedet den menneskelige sundhed og miljøet ved at afl evere dit brugte udstyr på et dertil beregnet indsamlingssted for af brugt, elektrisk og elektronisk udstyr. Kontakt nærmeste renovationsafdeling for yderligere oplysninger.
Dutch recycling notice
Inzameling van afgedankte apparatuur van particuliere huishoudens in de Europese Unie
Dit symbool betekent dat het product niet mag worden gedeponeerd bij het overige huishoudelijke afval.
Bescherm de gezondheid en het milieu door afgedankte apparatuur in te leveren bij een hiervoor bestemd inzamelpunt voor recycling van afgedankte elektrische en elektronische apparatuur. Neem voor meer informatie contact op met uw gemeentereinigingsdienst.
Recycling notices 223
Estonian recycling notice
Äravisatavate seadmete likvideerimine Euroopa Liidu eramajapidamistes
See märk näitab, et seadet ei tohi visata olmeprügi hulka. Inimeste tervise ja keskkonna säästmise nimel tuleb äravisatav toode tuua elektriliste ja elektrooniliste seadmete käitlemisega egelevasse kogumispunkti.
Küsimuste korral pöörduge kohaliku prügikäitlusettevõtte poole.
Finnish recycling notice
Kotitalousjätteiden hävittäminen Euroopan unionin alueella
Tämä symboli merkitsee, että laitetta ei saa hävittää muiden kotitalousjätteiden mukana. Sen sijaan sinun on suojattava ihmisten terveyttä ja ympäristöä toimittamalla käytöstä poistettu laite sähkö- tai elektroniikkajätteen kierrätyspisteeseen. Lisätietoja saat jätehuoltoyhtiöltä.
French recycling notice
Mise au rebut d'équipement par les utilisateurs privés dans l'Union Européenne
Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les ordures ménagères. Il est de votre responsabilité de protéger la santé et l'environnement et de vous débarrasser de votre équipement en le remettant à une déchetterie effectuant le recyclage des équipements électriques et électroniques.
Pour de plus amples informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'élimination des ordures ménagères.
German recycling notice
Entsorgung von Altgeräten von Benutzern in privaten Haushalten in der EU
Dieses Symbol besagt, dass dieses Produkt nicht mit dem Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Zum
Schutze der Gesundheit und der Umwelt sollten Sie stattdessen Ihre Altgeräte zur Entsorgung einer dafür vorgesehenen Recyclingstelle für elektrische und elektronische Geräte übergeben. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie von Ihrem Entsorgungsunternehmen für Hausmüll.
224 Regulatory statements
Greek recycling notice
???????? ???????? ?????????? ??? ??????? ??????? ???? ????????? ?????
???? ?? ??????? ???????? ??? ??? ?????? ?? ?????????? ?? ?????? ?? ?? ????? ??????? ???????????.
????????, ?????? ?? ???????????? ??? ????????? ????? ??? ?? ?????????? ???????????? ??? ???????
????????? ??? ?? ??????????????? ?????? ???????? ??? ??? ?????????? ???????? ?????????? ???
???????????? ??????????. ??? ???????????? ???????????, ????????????? ?? ??? ???????? ?????????
???????????? ??? ???????? ???.
Hungarian recycling notice
A hulladék anyagok megsemmisítése az Európai Unió háztartásaiban
Ez a szimbólum azt jelzi, hogy a készüléket nem szabad a háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. Ehelyett a leselejtezett berendezéseknek az elektromos vagy elektronikus hulladék átvételére kijelölt helyen történő beszolgáltatásával megóvja az emberi egészséget és a környezetet.További információt a helyi köztisztasági vállalattól kaphat.
Italian recycling notice
Smaltimento di apparecchiature usate da parte di utenti privati nell'Unione Europea
Questo simbolo avvisa di non smaltire il prodotto con i normali rifi uti domestici. Rispettare la salute umana e l'ambiente conferendo l'apparecchiatura dismessa a un centro di raccolta designato per il riciclo di apparecchiature elettroniche ed elettriche. Per ulteriori informazioni, rivolgersi al servizio per lo smaltimento dei rifi uti domestici.
Latvian recycling notice
Europos Sąjungos namų ūkio vartotojų įrangos atliekų šalinimas
Šis simbolis nurodo, kad gaminio negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis. Kad apsaugotumėte žmonių sveikatą ir aplinką, pasenusią nenaudojamą įrangą turite nuvežti į elektrinių ir elektroninių atliekų surinkimo punktą. Daugiau informacijos teiraukitės buitinių atliekų surinkimo tarnybos.
Recycling notices 225
Lithuanian recycling notice
Nolietotu iekārtu iznīcināšanas noteikumi lietotājiem Eiropas Savienības privātajās mājsaimniecībās
Šis simbols norāda, ka ierīci nedrīkst utilizēt kopā ar citiem mājsaimniecības atkritumiem. Jums jārūpējas par cilvēku veselības un vides aizsardzību, nododot lietoto aprīkojumu otrreizējai pārstrādei īpašā lietotu elektrisko un elektronisko ierīču savākšanas punktā. Lai iegūtu plašāku informāciju, lūdzu, sazinieties ar savu mājsaimniecības atkritumu likvidēšanas dienestu.
Polish recycling notice
Utylizacja zużytego sprzętu przez użytkowników w prywatnych gospodarstwach domowych w krajach Unii Europejskiej
Ten symbol oznacza, że nie wolno wyrzucać produktu wraz z innymi domowymi odpadkami.
Obowiązkiem użytkownika jest ochrona zdrowa ludzkiego i środowiska przez przekazanie zużytego sprzętu do wyznaczonego punktu zajmującego się recyklingiem odpadów powstałych ze sprzętu elektrycznego i elektronicznego. Więcej informacji można uzyskać od lokalnej firmy zajmującej wywozem nieczystości.
Portuguese recycling notice
Descarte de equipamentos usados por utilizadores domésticos na União Europeia
Este símbolo indica que não deve descartar o seu produto juntamente com os outros lixos domiciliares.
Ao invés disso, deve proteger a saúde humana e o meio ambiente levando o seu equipamento para descarte em um ponto de recolha destinado à reciclagem de resíduos de equipamentos eléctricos e electrónicos. Para obter mais informações, contacte o seu serviço de tratamento de resíduos domésticos.
Romanian recycling notice
Casarea echipamentului uzat de c?tre utilizatorii casnici din Uniunea European?
Acest simbol înseamnă să nu se arunce produsul cu alte deşeuri menajere. În schimb, trebuie să protejaţi sănătatea umană şi mediul predând echipamentul uzat la un punct de colectare desemnat pentru reciclarea echipamentelor electrice şi electronice uzate. Pentru informaţii suplimentare, vă rugăm să contactaţi serviciul de eliminare a deşeurilor menajere local.
226 Regulatory statements
Slovak recycling notice
Likvidácia vyradených zariadení používateľmi v domácnostiach v Európskej únii
Tento symbol znamená, že tento produkt sa nemá likvidovať s ostatným domovým odpadom. Namiesto toho by ste mali chrániť ľudské zdravie a životné prostredie odovzdaním odpadového zariadenia na zbernom mieste, ktoré je určené na recykláciu odpadových elektrických a elektronických zariadení.
Ďalšie informácie získate od spoločnosti zaoberajúcej sa likvidáciou domového odpadu.
Spanish recycling notice
Eliminación de los equipos que ya no se utilizan en entornos domésticos de la Unión Europea
Este símbolo indica que este producto no debe eliminarse con los residuos domésticos. En lugar de ello, debe evitar causar daños a la salud de las personas y al medio ambiente llevando los equipos que no utilice a un punto de recogida designado para el reciclaje de equipos eléctricos y electrónicos que ya no se utilizan. Para obtener más información, póngase en contacto con el servicio de recogida de residuos domésticos.
Swedish recycling notice
Hantering av elektroniskt avfall för hemanvändare inom EU
Den här symbolen innebär att du inte ska kasta din produkt i hushållsavfallet. Värna i stället om natur och miljö genom att lämna in uttjänt utrustning på anvisad insamlingsplats. Allt elektriskt och elektroniskt avfall går sedan vidare till återvinning. Kontakta ditt återvinningsföretag för mer information.
Battery replacement notices
Dutch battery notice
Battery replacement notices 227
French battery notice
German battery notice
228 Regulatory statements
Italian battery notice
Japanese battery notice
Battery replacement notices 229
Spanish battery notice
230 Regulatory statements
Glossary
This glossary consists of terms unique to the library along with some storage industry terminology.
Access door
Automated Media
Pool (AMP)
Refers to the doors on either the control module or expansion module from which you can access the magazines and accessor assembly.
A virtual partition that can be dynamically allocated to other, previously-created standard partitions, all without disrupting host or application operation. AMP magazines are presented to host applications as part of a standard partition, but AMP magazines appear as "inaccessible" until they are assigned to a normal partition. AMP may be thought of as “thin provisioning” for a tape library. Both the Partition license and the AMP license are required to enable AMP. Both licenses are sold on a per-library basis.
Capacity On
Demand (COD)
Control
Management
Blade (CMB)
Control module
A library feature that enables users to have a large physical library, but users pay only for what capacity they are currently using. License upgrades enable more capacity to be added without a system interruption.
A version of the MCB that has no I/O ports for Ethernet, SCSI, serial, or Fibre Channel. It is the controller board for the I/O management unit in expansion modules.
Data path
The first component of the library. It consists of an library management module, cartridges, drives, power, and an I/E station.
One of the many possible paths that data can move over in the storage area network environment, potentially involving many components or connections between initiators and targets that have been set since the initial configuration occurred.
Drive pooling Drives to be held in a pool (or pools) of drives. You can specify policy settings for the drive pools to configure how each pool will react to a drive failure and load balancing.
Drive sled position A slot where a Fibre Channel or SCSI drives reside in the control module or expansion module in one of the two drive clusters. There are six drive sled positions in each of the two drive clusters.
Ethernet Expansion
Blade (EEB)
Provides Ethernet connectivity to 6 Ethernet drives. This connectivity is to the library internal
Ethernet and should not be connected to an external Ethernet source.
Expansion module Expansion modules enlarge the library configuration by adding modules for additional media storage. You can add up eleven expansion modules to a library configuration. The first seven expansion modules may contain optional hardware, such as additional drives and I/E stations.
The HP encryption key management solutions that supports HP LTO-4 and LTO-5 FC tape drives.
HP Enterprise
Secure Key
Manager (ESKM)
I/E station A door on the access door of the control module (or expansion modules) that contains magazines into which cartridges can be imported into or exported out of the library.
All single door I/E stations are numbered starting with 1 at the control module. All double door
I/E stations are numbered with a number and a letter-for example 2A and 2B-the module number
(1-8), with A as the left I/E station and B the right.
I/O management unit
Latchhook
Library
Management
Console (LMC)
Library
Management
Module (LMM)
A management and connectivity interface for the library. The control module and first seven expansion modules can have I/O management units installed. The I/O management unit may contain a Control Management Blade (CMB) and Ethernet Expansion Blades (EEB).
The latches used to lock the printed circuit blades into place when they are inserted into the I/O management unit or library management module.
Library Management Console (LMC) The management software client for the library. You can use the LMC either locally from the OCP operator panel on the control module or remotely through a web browser running a Java applet.
The connectivity interface for the three blades that provide intelligence and connectivity to the library through the control module. The management control blade (MCB), robotics control unit
(RCU), and library motor drive (LMD) blades are installed in the LMM.
231
Linear Tape-Open
(LTO)
Management
Control Blade
(MCB)
Partition
A media technology that is open format. LTO comes in two formats, Accelis and Ultrium. Accelis is the fast access implementation, while Ultrium is the high capacity implementation.
The library controller board, which resides in the LMM. The MCB has I/O ports for Fibre Channel,
Ethernet, serial, and SCSI.
Picker
Service door
Write Once Read
Many (WORM)
X-axis
Y-axis
A partition is a logical portion of the physical library that is viewed by the host as if it is a complete library. Partitions present the appearance of multiple, separate libraries for purposes of file management, access by multiple users, or dedication to one or more host applications.
The robotic hand portion of the accessor assembly that handles cartridges.
The door on a control module or expansion module that provides access to the I/O management unit, LMM, power supplies, drive sleds and other components.
The ESL G3 tape library supports write once, read many technology in LTO-4 and greater tape drives. WORM allows a non-erasable date to be written once and provides extra data security by prohibiting accidental data erasure.
The horizontal position of the robotic accessor assembly.
The vertical position of the robotic accessor assembly.
232 Glossary
Index
A
access door,
advanced reporting,
air filters,
aisle lights,
automated media pool media,
B
barcode,
label,
requirements,
barcodes,
battery replacement notices,
blade status,
C
calibration teaching the library,
Canadian notice,
capacity on demand,
cartridge,
proper handling,
removing,
write-protect,
cartridges,
,
cleaning,
density,
exporting,
importing,
loading,
locations,
magazines,
change mode,
cleaning a drive,
cleaning magazine unassigning,
cleaning magazines,
cleaning media,
exporting,
CMB,
components subsystems,
configuration image file,
library,
modifying,
rescuing,
restore,
reverting,
save,
teaching the library,
type,
configuration record
Email,
save,
contacting HP,
control management blade,
control module,
control path,
configuration,
conventions document,
text symbols,
cooling fan information,
D
data path failover,
date set,
Declaration of Conformity,
defragmentation,
demonstration mode,
pause,
start,
stop,
Disposal of waste equipment, European Union,
DNS configuring,
document conventions,
download library software,
drive clean,
firmware,
loading,
setting up,
status,
unloading,
updating firmware,
drive cleaning,
drive cluster defined,
drives,
clean,
locations,
monitor status,
view,
view details,
E
e-mail,
configuration,
notifications,
,
EEB,
Email configuration record,
MIB files,
status information,
support tickets,
233
test logs,
encryption configuring partitions,
key management,
encryption key management,
error messages,
ESKM license key,
management solutions,
Ethernet explasion blade,
European Union notice,
event reports,
event detail reports,
event lists,
events ,
close,
command,
details,
,
guidelines,
history,
viewing,
events list,
events report,
expansion module,
expansion modules,
explorer frame view,
library view,
exporting cartridges,
F
FAQ,
features offline,
online,
Federal Communications Commission notice,
firmware downloading,
drive,
images,
library,
update tapes,
updating,
,
H
help obtaining,
hosts,
HP technical support,
I
I/E station,
extended,
locking/unlocking,
mointor status,
importing
234 Index cartridges,
indicator panel,
information panel description,
install library software,
installation instructions,
inventory,
J
Japanese notices,
job deleting,
editing,
scheduling,
K
Korean notices,
L
laser compliance notices,
LBX terminator,
LDAP,
configuring,
guidelines,
LED,
blade status,
drive status,
fibre port link,
LBX terminator,
MCB port,
power supply,
library control module,
cycle power,
demonstration mode,
see also demonstration mode density,
expansion module,
library management module (LMM),
offline,
online,
overview,
power off,
power on,
reboot,
report,
robotics not ready,
shutdown,
software,
teaching,
troubleshooting,
library configuration,
library explorer frame view,
library view,
library firmware,
Library Management Console see LMC library motor driver,
library software,
updating,
license key,
LMC,
access,
access the applet,
managed views region,
menus,
remote client,
software requirements,
LMD,
LMM,
loading drives,
local user,
create account,
delete account,
modify account,
view account permissions,
location coordinates,
cartridges,
drives,
log off
OCP,
remote client LMC,
logon multiple libraries,
OCP,
remote client LMC,
M
magazines cartridges,
mailing event information,
managed views,
management control blade,
managing media,
MCB,
MCB port,
media,
moving,
media status information,
media usage report,
menus,
privileges and environments,
MIB files
Retrieve, Email, and Save,
mode,
monitor,
cooling fan,
drive status,
events,
I/E station,
key management,
media,
partition status details,
partitions status,
power supply,
sensor,
sensor status,
slots,
system status,
temperature,
voltage,
N
network configuration,
,
notifications,
e-mail,
O
OCP,
,
Overall System Status,
P
partition,
control path,
exporting cartridges,
importing cartridges,
media,
offline,
online,
partition status,
partition status details,
partitions,
creating,
data path failover,
deleting,
modifying,
partitions defragmentation,
cancelling,
interrupted,
recovering,
running,
password,
picker,
power,
backup,
cycle,
power off,
power on,
power supply
LED,
power supply information,
print event information,
status information,
R
rack stability warning,
RCU,
reboot,
recycling notices,
regulatory compliance
Canadian notice,
European Union notice,
Japanese notices,
235
Korean notices,
laser,
recycling notices,
Taiwanese notices,
repair pages,
report library,
MIB files,
report criteria templates,
report template save,
reports
Tape Alert History Report,
requirements software for running LMC,
restore library configuration,
Retrieve
MIB files,
robotics not ready,
robotics control unit,
S
Save
MIB files,
save configuration record,
event information,
library configuration,
local restore image,
remote restore image,
report template,
status information,
support tickets,
,
saving templates,
screen saver,
Secure Manager
Access Group Configuration,
add a host to an Access Group,
change Access Group name,
create a host,
create an Access Group,
delete a host,
delete an Access Group,
enable/disable,
Host Access Configuration,
Host Configuration,
modify a host,
remove a host from an access group,
security,
Send test logs,
sensor status,
serial number,
setup wizard,
shutdown,
236 Index
Sift Sort capture,
export media,
using,
slots check status,
filter,
monitor status,
SNMP traps,
software downloading,
installing,
library,
,
reinstalling,
rollback,
update,
status indicator,
status information mail, save, and print,
storage density,
subsystem power,
subsystems components,
support tickets create,
Email,
Email and Save,
save,
symbols in text,
system status monitor,
T
Taiwanese notices,
tape alerts,
technical support
HP,
service locator website,
temperature information,
templates report criteria,
test logs
Email or Send,
text symbols,
time set,
toolbar,
troubleshooting library,
typographic conventions,
U
unloading drives,
update library software,
software wizard,
user
library/partition,
privileges,
status,
users local,
V
Verification Tests
Accessor Assembly,
boundary/accessibility graphical report,
calibration offsets graphical report,
Custom,
drive inventory,
Drive Sled Assembly,
FRU,
functions,
Get/Put,
Get/Put graphical report,
graphical reports,
horizontal alignments graphical report,
I/E Station Assembly,
initiating,
Install,
inventory,
joint alignments graphical report,
Library Alignment,
library inventory,
logs,
overview,
Partial,
Picker Assembly,
picker pivot/reach graphical report,
results,
Scan Barcode,
scan fiducials graphical report,
Scanner Fiducial,
vertical alignments graphical report,
verification tests,
view,
voltage information,
W
warning rack stability,
websites
HP ,
WORM,
237
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement